SlideShare a Scribd company logo

Ibu Rumah Tangga

•
•
Ines Pratiwi
Ines Pratiwi

Berdasarkan dokumen tersebut, ringkasan utamanya adalah: 1. Penelitian mengenai preferensi program televisi ibu rumah tangga di dua RT yang berbeda (RT 10 dan RT 12) 2. Hasilnya menunjukkan bahwa ibu rumah tangga di kedua lokasi memiliki preferensi yang mirip, terutama menyukai stasiun televisi SCTV dan program hiburan seperti sinetron 3. Penelitian ini bertujuan untuk mengetahui profil dem

News & Politics
1 of 82
Created by : Ines Pratiwi
TV Introduction Programming Hasil Penelitian terhadap Audiens (Ibu-Ibu Rumah Tangga) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Ines Ines Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Pratiwi Pratiwi Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. (44111010067) Type(44111010067) your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Penelitian Program Acara Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Penelitian Penelitian Penelitian Demografi Kuantitatif Kualitatif Rating dan Share Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Kategori Usia • Audiens RT 10 • Audiens RT 12 Kategori Pendapatan • Audiens RT 10 • Audiens RT 12 Kategori Pendidikan • Audiens RT 10 • Audiens RT 12 Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Usia RT 10 4% 4% 16% 40% < 17 Tahun 17 – 25 Tahun 25 – 35 Tahun 35 – 45 Tahun > 45 Tahun 36% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Usia RT 12 8% 16% 17 – 25 Tahun 48% 25 – 35 Tahun 35 – 45 Tahun > 45 Tahun 28% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Kategori Antara Usia RT 10 dan RT 12 14 12 Jumlah Audiens 10 8 RT 10 6 12 RT 12 10 4 9 7 2 4 4 1 0 1 2 0 < 17 Tahun 17 – 25 Tahun 25 – 35 Tahun 35 – 45 Tahun > 45 Tahun Created by : Ines Pratiwi Usia
Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori usia ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu 45 Tahun ke atas. Sedangkan usia terendah yaitu kisaran antara 17 – 35 tahun. 2. Kategori usia ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu 45 tahun ke atas. Sedangkan usia terendah yaitu usia dibawah 25 tahun ke bawah. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan usia antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan usia memiliki perbandingan yang berbeda tipis. Usia di bawah 17 dimiliki oleh sangat sedikit audiens. Dan di atas 45 tahun memiliki jumlah audiens yang paling besar. Kesimpulannya, hasil dari audiens terhadap ibu-ibu rumah tangga hanya memiliki usia yang relative sudah tua. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Pendapatan RT 10 8% 20% 1 Juta – 4 Juta 5 Juta – 9 Juta Tidak Menentu 72% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Pendapatan RT 12 20% 1 Juta – 4 Juta 5 Juta – 9 Juta 16% Tidak Menentu 64% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Kategori Pendapatan 20 Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 18 16 Jumlah Audiens 14 12 10 RT 10 18 RT 12 8 16 6 4 2 5 4 5 2 0 1 Juta – 4 Juta 5 Juta – 9 Juta Tidak Menentu Created by : Ines Pratiwi Jumlah Pendapatan
Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori pendapatan ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu 1 Juta – 4 Juta. Sedangkan pendapatan terendah yaitu tidak menentu (tergantung hasil penjualan). 2. Kategori pendapatan ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu 1 juta – 4 juta. Sedangkan pendapatan terendah yaitu 5 juta – 9 juta rupiah. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan pendapatan antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan pendapatan memiliki perbandingan yang berbeda tipis. Pendapatan RT 10 dengan RT 12 antara 5 juta – 9 juta dan tidak menentu memiliki perbandingan terbalik. Tidak menentu didominasi oleh RT 12 sedangkan 5 juta – 9 juta didominasi oleh RT 10. Sedangkan kisaran pendapatan antara 1 Juta – 4 Juta didominasi oleh RT 10 sebanyak 18 dan RT 12 sebanyak 16. Berarti dapat dikatakan ibu-ibu rumah tangga RT 10 dan RT 12 memilki penghasilan sebesar 1Juta – 4 juta. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Pendidikan RT 10 4% 12% 24% SMP SMA D3 S1 60% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Pendidikan RT 12 4% 12% 28% SD SMP SMA D3 S1 12% 44% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Kategori Pendidikan Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 16 14 12 Jumlah Audiens 10 8 RT 10 15 RT 12 6 11 4 6 7 2 0 1 2 3 3 1 0 SD SMP SMA D3 S1 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Tingkat Pendidikan
Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori pendidikan terakhir ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu tingkat SMU. Sedangkan pendidikan terakhir paling rendah yaitu S1 (Strata 1). 2. Kategori pendidikan terakhir ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu tingkat SMU. Sedangkan pendidikan terakhir paling rendah yaitu tingak SD. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan pendidikan antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang berbeda tipis. Tingkat SD dimiliki oleh sangat sedikit audiens. Dan tingkat SMA memiliki jumlah audiens yang paling besar. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki tingkat pendidikan yang masih dapat dikatakan relative rendah untuk era saat ini yaitu tingkat SMU. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Program Favorite Program Favorite Acara Hiburan Acara Sinetron Stasiun TV Favorite Program Favorite Program Favorite Acara Ceramah Acara Infotainment Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Program Favorite Acara Reality Show Program Favorite Acara Berita Lama Waktu Menonton Sering/ Jarang Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Stasiun TV Favorite RT 10 16% 20% SCTV RCTI Indosiar 16% Metro TV TV One 20% TVRI 4% Trans TV Trans 7 12% 4% 8% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Stasiun TV Favorite RT 12 8% 28% SCTV 20% RCTI ANTV METRO TV TRANS TV TRANS 7 16% 16% TV One 8% 4% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Stasiun TV Favorite 8 Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 7 7 6 Jumlah Audiens 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 3 3 RT 10 2 2 2 RT 12 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 -1 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Stasiun TV
Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori stasiun TV favorite ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu SCTV. Sedangkan stasiun TV favorite paling rendah yaitu indosiar dan TVRI. 2. Kategori stasiun TV favorite ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu SCTV. Sedangkan stasiun TV favorite paling rendah yaitu Antv. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan stasiun TV favorite antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang berbeda tipis karena keduanya didominasi oleh SCTV dan RCTI. 4. Pada RT 10 stasiun TV Antv tidak dimiliki audiens sebagai stasiun favorite, sedangkan di RT 12 stasun TV Indosiar tidak dimiliki audiens sebagai stasiun favorite. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu- ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki stasiun TV Favorite terhadap SCTV yang memiliki program acara umum termasuk sinetron dan berita. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Penonton TV SCTV = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Penonton TV RCTI = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Penonton TV Indosiar = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton TV Metro TV = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton TV One = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton TV TVRI = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton TV Trans TV = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton TV Trans 7 = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Share Share TV SCTV = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Share TV RCTI = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Share TV Indosiar = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Share TV Metro TV = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Share TV One = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Share TV TVRI = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Share TV Trans TV = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Share TV Trans 7 = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% (Nb : Global TV, MNC TV, dan Antv tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Penonton TV SCTV = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Penonton TV RCTI = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton TV Antv = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton TV Metro TV = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton TV Trans TV = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton TV Trans 7 = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Penonton TV One = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Share Share TV SCTV = 7 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 28% Share TV RCTI = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Share TV Antv = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Share TV Metro TV = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Share TV Trans TV = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Share TV Trans 7 = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Share TV One = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% (Nb : Global TV, MNC TV, TVRI dan Indosiar tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Waktu Menonton Audiens RT 10 20% Pagi Hari 28% Siang Hari Sore Hari Malam Hari 24% 12% Larut Malam 16% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Waktu Menonton Audiens RT 12 8% 28% Pagi Hari Siang Hari Malam Hari 8% Larut Malam 56% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Waktu Menonton Audiens Antara RT 10 dan 12 16 14 14 12 12 Jumlah Audiens 10 8 7 RT 10 6 RT 12 4 4 4 3 2 2 2 0 0 Pagi Hari Siang Hari Sore Hari Malam Hari Larut Malam -2 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Waktu Menonton
Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori waktu menonton ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu waktu malam hari. Sedangkan waktu menonton paling rendah yaitu waktu siang hari. 2. Kategori waktu menonton ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu malam hari. Sedangkan waktu menonton paling rendah yaitusiang hari dan larut malam. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan waktu menonton antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang sama karena keduanya didominasi oleh waktu menonton di malam hari dan minimnya saat siang hari. 4. Pada RT 12 waktu menonton di sore hari tidak dimiliki audiens, sedangkan di RT 10 ada. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki waktu menonton di malam hari karena berkaitan dengan waktu prime time sekitar pukul 19.00 WIB – 22.00 WIB. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Sinetron RT 10 28% Tukang Bubur Naik Haji Love in Paris 60% Lain-lain 12% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Sinetron RT 12 4% 4% Cinta Fitri 36% Ketika Cinta Bertasbih Tukang Bubur Naik Haji 40% Love in Paris Lain-lain 16% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Program Favorit Acara Sinetron Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 16 15 14 12 Jumlah Audiens 10 10 9 8 7 RT 10 6 RT 12 4 4 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 Cinta Fitri Ketika Cinta Tukang Bubur Love in Paris Lain - lain -2 Bertasbih Naik Haji Created by : Ines Pratiwi Judul Sinetron
Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori Program Favorite Acara Sinetron ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 dan RT 12 yaitu Tukang Bubur Naik Haji sebesar 60% dan 40%. Sedangkan waktu menonton paling rendah di RT 10 yaitu Love in Paris dan di RT 12 yaitu Cinta Fitri sekaligus Ketika Cinta Bertasbih. 2. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan Program Favorite Acara Sinetron antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang hamper sama karena keduanya didominasi oleh Tukang Bubur Naik Haji dan dilanjutkan ke yang lain-lain (Nama program acara tidak tertera di quesioner dari seluruh program acara yang tertera sebelumnya). Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu- ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki Program Favorite Acara Sinetron Tukang Bubur Naik Haji karena berkaitan dengan waktu prime time sekitar pukul 19.00 WIB serta waktu santai/senggang selain itu karena acaranya bagus. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Penonton Tukang Bubur Naik Haji = 15 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 30% Penonton Love in Paris = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Share Penonton Tukang Bubur Naik Haji = 15 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 60% Penonton Love in Paris = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 7 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 28% (Nb : Cinta Fitri, Putri Kembar,dan Ketika Cinta Bertasbih tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Penonton Tukang Bubur Naik Haji = 10 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 20% Penonton Love in Paris = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Cinta Fitri = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton Ketika Cinta Bertasbih = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 9 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 18% Share Penonton Tukang Bubur Naik Haji = 10 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 40% Penonton Love in Paris = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Penonton Cinta Fitri = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Ketika Cinta Bertasbih = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 9 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 36% (Nb : Putri Kembar tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Program Favorite Acara Infotainment RT 10 8% 16% Intens 36% Silet Kiss 4% Selebrita Insert Lain-lain 12% 24% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Program Favorit Acara Infotainment RT 12 24% 28% Silet Insert Lain-lain 48% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Kategori Program Favorit Acara Infotainment Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 14 12 12 10 Jumlah Audiens 9 8 7 6 6 6 RT 10 RT 12 4 4 3 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 Intens Silet Kiss Selebrita Insert Lain-lain -2 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Nama Infotainment
Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori program favorite acara infotainment ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu lain-lain (Nama program acara tidak tertera di quesioner dari seluruh program acara yang tertera sebelumnya) sebanyak 36% lalu dilanjutkan dengan insert sebanyak 24%. Sedangkan program favorite acara infotainment paling rendah yaitu Kiss. 2. Kategori program favorite acara infotainment ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu insert sebanyak 48%. Sedangkan paling rendah program favorite acara infotainment yaitu lain-lain. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan program favorite acara infotainment antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang jauh karena keduanya memiliki garis grafik dengan bentuk berbeda. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki program favorite acara infotainment didominasi oleh Insert karena kualitasnya lebih baik. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Penonton Intens = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Silet = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Kiss = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton Selebrita = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Insert = 6 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Acara infotainment Lainnya = 9 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 18% Share Penonton Intens = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Silet = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Penonton Kiss = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Selebrita = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Insert = 6 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 24% Penonton Acara infotainment Lainnya = 9 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 36% (Nb : Selebrita Punya Story tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Penonton Silet = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Penonton Insert = 12 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 24% Penonton Acaara infotainment Lainnya = 6 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 12% Share Penonton Silet = 7 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 28% Penonton Insert = 12 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 48% Penonton Acara infotainment Lainnya = 6 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 24% (Nb : Kiss, Selebrita, Selebrita Punya Story, Intens, tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Program Favorite Acara Ceramah RT 10 8% 28% Wisata Hati Islam itu Indah Chatting Bareng YM Lain-lain 44% 20% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Program Favorite Acara Ceramah RT 12 12% 8% 12% 12% Kata Ustad Solmed Wisata Hati Islam itu Indah Chatting bersama YM Lain-lain 56% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Kategori Program Favorite Acara Ceramah 16 Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 14 14 12 11 Jumlah Audiens 10 8 7 RT 10 6 5 RT 12 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 0 0 Kata Ustad Wisata Hati Islam Itu Chatting Lain-lain Solmed Indah Bareng YM Created by : Ines Pratiwi Nama Program Ceramah
Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori program favorite acara ceramah ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 dan RT 12 yaitu Islam itu Indah sebanyak 36% dan 56%. Sedangkan program favorite acara ceramah paling rendah di RT 10 yakni Wisata Hati dan paling rendah di RT 12 yaitu Kata Ustad Solmed. 2. Kategori program favorite acara ceramah ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu insert sebanyak 48%. Sedangkan paling rendah program favorite acara infotainment yaitu lain-lain. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan program favorite acara ceramah antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang hampir sama karena keduanya memiliki garis grafik dengan bentuk garis memuncak dibagian tengahnya. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki program favorite acara ceramah didominasi oleh Islam Itu Indah karena program tersebut menghibur sekaligus waktu tayang setelah shubuh (di pagi hari). Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Penonton Wisata Hati = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Islam Itu Indah = 11 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 22% Penonton Chatting Bareng YM = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Penonton Acara ceramah Lainnya = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Share Penonton Wisata Hati = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Islam Itu Indah = 11 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 44% Penonton Chatting Bareng YM = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 6 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 24% (Nb : Ass Ustad, dan Kata Ustad Solmed tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Penonton Kata Ustad Solmed = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Wisata Hati = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Islam Itu Indah = 14 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 28% Penonton Chatting Bareng YM = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Acara ceramah Lainnya = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Share Penonton Kata Ustad Solmed = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Wisata Hati = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Islam Itu Indah = 14 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 56% Penonton Chatting Bareng YM = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% (Nb : Ass Ustad tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Berita RT 10 4% 16% Buletin Indonesia Reportase Redaksi 12% 36% Headline News Fokus 4% Liputan 6 Lain-lain 24% 4% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Berita RT 12 4% 4% 4% 4% Live News 16% Buletin Indonesia Reportase Redaksi Headline News Liputan 6 44% 20% Fokus Lain-lain 4% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Kategori Program Favorite Acara Berita Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 12 11 10 9 Jumlah Audiens 8 6 6 5 RT 10 4 4 3 3 RT12 2 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 -2 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Nama Program Berita
• Kategori program favorite acara berita ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 dan RT 12 yaitu Reportase sebanyak 36% dan 44%. Sedangkan paling rendah di RT 10 dan RT 12 yaitu Buletin Indonesia, Fokus dan One Redaksi. • Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan program favorite acara berita antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang hampir sama karena keduanya Two memiliki garis grafik dengan bentuk garis bergelombang dari tertinggi hingga terendah. • Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki program favorite acara berita yang didominasi oleh Reportase karena program tersebut lebih bervariasi Three sekaligus waktu tayang senggang. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
• Penonton Buletin Indonesia = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% • Penonton Reportase = 9 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 18% • Penonton Redaksi = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% • Penonton Headline News = 6 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 12% • Penonton Fokus = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Rating • Penonton Liputan 6 = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% • Penonton Acara Berita Lainnya= 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% •Penonton Buletin Indonesia = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% • Penonton Reportase = 9 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 36% • Penonton Redaksi = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% • Penonton Headline News = 6 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 24% • Penonton Fokus = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Share • Penonton Liputan 6 = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% • Penonton Acara Berita Lainnya= 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% (Nb : Live News dan Lintas tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
• Penonton Live News = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% • Penonton Buletin Indonesia = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% • Penonton Reportase = 11 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 22% • Penonton Redaksi = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% • Penonton Headline News = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Rating • Penonton Fokus • Penonton Liputan 6 = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% • Penonton Acara Berita Lainnya= 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% •Penonton Live News = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% • Penonton Buletin Indonesia = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% • Penonton Reportase = 11 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 44% • Penonton Redaksi = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% • Penonton Headline News = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Share • Penonton Fokus • Penonton Liputan 6 = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% • Penonton Acara Berita Lainnya= 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% (Nb : Lintas tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Hiburan RT 10 4% 4% 20% Dahsyat Awas Ada Sule Opera Van Java 12% Pesbukers Lain-lain 60% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Hiburan RT 12 12% 4% Dahsyat Awas Ada Sule Opera Van Java 84% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Kategori Program Favorite Acara Hiburan Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 25 20 21 Jumlah Audiens 15 15 RT 10 10 RT12 5 5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 Dahsyat Awas Ada Sule Opera Van Pesbukers Lain-lain Java -5 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Nama Program Hiburan
Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori program favorite acara hiburan ibu- ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 dan RT 12 yaitu OVJ sebesar 60% dan 84%. Sedangkan paling rendah keduanya yaitu Awas Ada Sule. 2. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan program favorite acara hiburan antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang hampir sama karena keduanya memiliki garis grafik dengan bentuk memuncak di bagian tengahnya. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki program favorite acara hiburan yang didominasi oleh OVJ karena program tersebut dinilai sangat menarik, lucu, baik, menghibur dan waktu tayang yang tepat dengan waktu istirahat ibu- ibu rumah tangga. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Stasiun TV Penonton Dahsyat = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton Awas Ada Sule = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton OVJ = 15 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 30% Penonton Pesbukers = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Acara Hiburan Lain= 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Share Stasiun TV Penonton Dahsyat = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Awas Ada Sule = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton OVJ = 15 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 60% Penonton Pesbukers = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Acara Hiburan Lain= 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% (Nb : Inbox, dan KLIK! tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Stasiun TV Penonton Dahsyat = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Awas Ada Sule = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton OVJ = 21 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 30% Share Stasiun TV Penonton Dahsyat = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Awas Ada Sule = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton OVJ = 21 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 84% (Nb : Inbox, Pesbukers, dan KLIK! tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Reality Show RT 10 12% Indonesia Idol 28% Take Me Out 8% Super Trap Indonesia Mencari Bakat 24% Lain-lain 28% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Reality Show RT 12 16% Indonesia Idol 20% Take Me Out Termehek-Mehek 12% Uya Emang Kuya Super Trap 8% Indonesia Mencari 40% 4% Bakat Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Kategori Program Favorite Acara Reality Show Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 12 10 10 Jumlah Audiens 8 7 7 6 6 RT 10 5 RT12 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 Indonesian Take Me Termehek Uya Super Indonesia Lain-lain -2 Idol Out Emang Trap Mencari Kuya Bakat Created by : Ines Pratiwi Nama Program Reality Show
Kategori program favorite acara reality show ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu IMB sebanyak 28% Sedangkan paling rendah yaituTake Me Out. Kategori program favorite acara reality show ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu Super Trap sebanyak 40%. Sedangkan paling rendah program favorite acara Reality Show yaitu Uya Emang Kuya. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan program favorite acara Reality Show antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang relative berbeda karena keduanya memiliki garis peningkatan berbeda di bagian akhirnya. ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 memiliki program favorite acara Reality Show yaitu IMB dan RT 12 memiliki program favorite acara Reality Show yang didominasi oleh Super Trap karena program tersebut dinilai sangat menarik, menghibur dan waktu tayang yang tepat dengan waktu istirahat ibu-ibu rumah tangga. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Penonton Indonesian Idol = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Take Me Out = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Super Trap = 6 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton IMB = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Penonton Acara Hiburan Lainnya = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Share Penonton Indonesian Idol = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Take Me Out = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Super Trap = 6 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 24% Penonton IMB = 7 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 28% Penonton Acara Hiburan Lainnya = 7 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 28% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Rating Penonton Indonesian Idol = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Take Me Out = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Termehek-mehek = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Uya Emang Kuya = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton Super Trap = 10 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 20% Penonton IMB = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Share Penonton Indonesian Idol = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Penonton Take Me Out = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Termehek-mehek = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Uya Emang Kuya = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Super Trap = 10 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 40% Penonton IMB = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Lama Waktu Menonton Audiens RT 10 20% 28% 10 – 15 Menit 15 – 20 Menit 20 – 25 Menit 25 – 30 Menit 24% > 30 Menit 12% 16% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Lama Waktu Menonton Audiens RT 12 12% 8% 10 - 15 menit 48% 8% 15 - 20 menit 20 - 25 menit 25 - 30 menit > 30 menit 24% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Kategori Lama Waktu Menonton Audiens Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 14 12 12 Jumlah Audiens 10 8 7 6 6 RT 10 5 RT12 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 0 10 - 15 menit 15 - 20 menit 20 - 25 menit 25 - 30 menit > 30 menit Created by : Ines Pratiwi Lama Waktu
Created by : Ines Pratiwi :10 1. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Kategori lama waktu menonton ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu 10 – 15 menit sebanyak 28% Sedangkan paling rendah yaitu 15 – 20 menit. 2. Kategori lama waktu menonton ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu lebih dari 30 menit sebanyak 48%. Sedangkan paling rendah yaitu 15 – 25 menit. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan lama waktu menonton ibu-ibu rumah tangga antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang sangat berbeda karena keduanya memiliki garislekukan yang selalu Kesimpulan berbeda naik turunnya. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga memiliki lama waktu menonton di RT 10 yaitu didominasi oleh 15 – 20 menit (biasa disebut low viewer) karena sibuk melakukan aktivitas dibandingkan dengan menonton TV seberjam-jam. Berbeda dengan audiens RT 12 didominasi lebih dari 30 menit (disebut high viewer) karena waktu istirahat sangat banyak.
Persentase Kategori Sering/Jarang Menonton TV RT 10 12% 28% Sering KadangKala Jarang 60% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Persentase Kategori Sering/Jarang Menonton TV RT 12 20% 44% Sering Kadangkala Jarang 36% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Perbandingan Kategori Sering/Jarang Menonton TV Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 16 15 14 12 Jumlah Audiens 11 10 9 8 RT 10 7 RT12 6 5 4 3 2 0 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Sering Kadangkala Jarang
Kesimpulan 1. Kategori Sering/Jarang menonton Televisi audiens (ibu-ibu rumah tangga) tertinggi kadangkala menontonnya sebanyak 60% Sedangkan paling rendah yaitu jarang menonton. 2. Kategori Sering/Jarang menonton Televisi audiens (ibu-ibu rumah tangga) tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu sering menonton sebanyak 44%. Sedangkan paling rendah yaitu jarang menonton. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan Sering/Jarang menonton Televisi audiens (ibu-ibu rumah tangga) antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa perbandingan keduanya memiliki garis yang sangat jauh berbeda. Jika RT 12 memiliki garis menyerupai garis lurus sedikit melengkung ke bawah sedangkan RT 10 memiliki garis berupa lengkungan ke atas di bagian tengahnya. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 tidak begitu sering menonton dan RT 12 lebih sering menonton. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Penelitian Kualitatif Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Program acara sinetron saat ini sudah bagus dan baik-baik saja. Namun beberapa dari mereka beranggapan sinetron saat ini kurang mendidik dan lebih kearah negative buat masyarakat. Perkembangan televisi saat ini juga dinilai oleh ibu-ibu rumah tangga semakin bagus, sebagian ada unsur mendidik/edukatif dan memberikan banyak pengetahuan seperti Trans TV dan Trans 7. Tanggapan ibu-ibu rumah tangga terhadap program acara infotainment yakni lebih banyak yang menjawab kurang baik dan kurang menyukai sebab banyak memberikan isu-isu negative tentang selebritis di Indonesia. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Jadi pada intinya, program acara sinetron saat ini dinilai kurang mendidik, banyak adegan kekerasan, dan dinilai membawa pengaruh negative khususnya buat anak-anak karena beberapa perkataan kasar seringkali diucapkan. Jika perkembangan televisi saat ini sudah dinilai semakin bagus karena selalu ada perkembangan dengan menampilkan program acara berkualitas dan lebih baik dari yang sebelumnya. Sedangkan, perasaan ibu-ibu rumah tangga setelah menonton program acara yang mereka tonton yaitu merasa senang, puas, dan beberapa menyatakan bisa menghilangkan sedikit stress serta menambah wawasan. Namun, tanggapan mereka terhadap infotainment dinilai kurang baik karena menyebarkan isu-isu negative dan bisa membuat kita menjadi orang negative pula. Pada dasarnya, ibu-ibu memilih waktu menonton pada waktu malam hari karena waktu santai atau istirahat jadi tidak terbebani pikiran dan pekerjaan lainnya. Terkahir, hal ini sangat disayangkan, mengapa? Karena ibu-ibu sekarang lebih cenderung menaruh tingkat perhatian terhadap apa-apa yang ditontonnya yakni biasa saja. Mereka hanya ingin menikmati masa-masa santai dan mendapatkan hiburan maupun pengetahuan sekilas Created by : Ines Pratiwi saja tanpa ingin ditelaah dan diteliti terlebih dahulu.
Media massa seringkali mempersuasi orang lain dengan berita-berita baru. Hambatannya yaitu tidak semua orang mampu menganggap informasi yang disampaikan tersebut penting, sehingga efektifitas persuasi bisa menjadi lebih efektif atau bahkan tidak sama sekali. Untuk itu, harus lebih ditinjau lagi dan diperlihatkan lagi aspek positifnya dalam menayangkan program acara. Statement or Sebagai broadcaster, seharusnya kita mengenal terlebih dahulu apa saja selera audiens dilingkungan kita sebelum kita menciptakan suatu program acara caption diterima oleh agar dapat masyarakat yang memiliki perbedaan budaya atau kebiasaan sekalipun. Sebab, keuntungan program acara kita terletak pada seberapa besar pilihan audiens. Jika kita mendapatkan jumlah penonton yang banyak, maka penghasilan untuk pemasukan kita menyuguhkan acara tersebut lebih meningkat dan lebih berhasil. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
Created by : Ines Pratiwi

Recommended

넷플릭스 전통적인 TV 시장지형을 변화시키다 v120507
넷플릭스 전통적인 TV 시장지형을 변화시키다 v120507넷플릭스 전통적인 TV 시장지형을 변화시키다 v120507
넷플릭스 전통적인 TV 시장지형을 변화시키다 v120507SeungBeom Ha
 
OTT - Exclusive contents 시대가 온다 - 20151005
OTT - Exclusive contents 시대가 온다 - 20151005OTT - Exclusive contents 시대가 온다 - 20151005
OTT - Exclusive contents 시대가 온다 - 20151005Johan Kim
 
Produk you c1000 dan semiotika
Produk you c1000 dan semiotikaProduk you c1000 dan semiotika
Produk you c1000 dan semiotikaInes Pratiwi
 
Etika n filsafat komunikasi baru
Etika n filsafat komunikasi baruEtika n filsafat komunikasi baru
Etika n filsafat komunikasi baruInes Pratiwi
 
Etik umb tindakan korupsi
Etik umb tindakan korupsiEtik umb tindakan korupsi
Etik umb tindakan korupsiInes Pratiwi
 
Etik umb leadership and teamwork
Etik umb leadership and teamworkEtik umb leadership and teamwork
Etik umb leadership and teamworkInes Pratiwi
 
Etik umb investigasi tindak korupsi
Etik umb investigasi tindak korupsiEtik umb investigasi tindak korupsi
Etik umb investigasi tindak korupsiInes Pratiwi
 
Intercultural communication
Intercultural communicationIntercultural communication
Intercultural communicationInes Pratiwi
 

Recommended

넷플릭스 전통적인 TV 시장지형을 변화시키다 v120507
넷플릭스 전통적인 TV 시장지형을 변화시키다 v120507넷플릭스 전통적인 TV 시장지형을 변화시키다 v120507
넷플릭스 전통적인 TV 시장지형을 변화시키다 v120507SeungBeom Ha
 
OTT - Exclusive contents 시대가 온다 - 20151005
OTT - Exclusive contents 시대가 온다 - 20151005OTT - Exclusive contents 시대가 온다 - 20151005
OTT - Exclusive contents 시대가 온다 - 20151005Johan Kim
 
Produk you c1000 dan semiotika
Produk you c1000 dan semiotikaProduk you c1000 dan semiotika
Produk you c1000 dan semiotikaInes Pratiwi
 
Etika n filsafat komunikasi baru
Etika n filsafat komunikasi baruEtika n filsafat komunikasi baru
Etika n filsafat komunikasi baruInes Pratiwi
 
Etik umb tindakan korupsi
Etik umb tindakan korupsiEtik umb tindakan korupsi
Etik umb tindakan korupsiInes Pratiwi
 
Etik umb leadership and teamwork
Etik umb leadership and teamworkEtik umb leadership and teamwork
Etik umb leadership and teamworkInes Pratiwi
 
Etik umb investigasi tindak korupsi
Etik umb investigasi tindak korupsiEtik umb investigasi tindak korupsi
Etik umb investigasi tindak korupsiInes Pratiwi
 
Intercultural communication
Intercultural communicationIntercultural communication
Intercultural communicationInes Pratiwi
 
Hypodermic needle
Hypodermic needleHypodermic needle
Hypodermic needleInes Pratiwi
 
Kommas pers
Kommas persKommas pers
Kommas persInes Pratiwi
 
Pkt suku kajang
Pkt suku kajangPkt suku kajang
Pkt suku kajangInes Pratiwi
 
Etik umb Toward to be change
Etik umb Toward to be changeEtik umb Toward to be change
Etik umb Toward to be changeInes Pratiwi
 
Etik umb Corruption
Etik umb CorruptionEtik umb Corruption
Etik umb CorruptionInes Pratiwi
 
Berpikir positif etik umb
Berpikir positif etik umbBerpikir positif etik umb
Berpikir positif etik umbInes Pratiwi
 
Theory of communication
Theory of communication Theory of communication
Theory of communication Ines Pratiwi
 
Phsycology of communication
Phsycology of communication Phsycology of communication
Phsycology of communication Ines Pratiwi
 
Citizenship
CitizenshipCitizenship
CitizenshipInes Pratiwi
 
Social knowledge
Social knowledgeSocial knowledge
Social knowledgeInes Pratiwi
 
Religion
ReligionReligion
ReligionInes Pratiwi
 
Pengantar ilmu komunikasi
Pengantar ilmu komunikasiPengantar ilmu komunikasi
Pengantar ilmu komunikasiInes Pratiwi
 
Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22
Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22
Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22Ines Pratiwi
 
Indonesia
IndonesiaIndonesia
IndonesiaInes Pratiwi
 
Economy
EconomyEconomy
EconomyInes Pratiwi
 
Application of computer
Application of computerApplication of computer
Application of computerInes Pratiwi
 

More Related Content

More from Ines Pratiwi

Etik umb Toward to be change
Etik umb Toward to be changeEtik umb Toward to be change
Etik umb Toward to be changeInes Pratiwi
 
Etik umb Corruption
Etik umb CorruptionEtik umb Corruption
Etik umb CorruptionInes Pratiwi
 
Berpikir positif etik umb
Berpikir positif etik umbBerpikir positif etik umb
Berpikir positif etik umbInes Pratiwi
 
Theory of communication
Theory of communication Theory of communication
Theory of communication Ines Pratiwi
 
Phsycology of communication
Phsycology of communication Phsycology of communication
Phsycology of communication Ines Pratiwi
 
Pengantar ilmu komunikasi
Pengantar ilmu komunikasiPengantar ilmu komunikasi
Pengantar ilmu komunikasiInes Pratiwi
 
Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22
Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22
Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22Ines Pratiwi
 
Application of computer
Application of computerApplication of computer
Application of computerInes Pratiwi
 

More from Ines Pratiwi (16)

Hypodermic needle
Hypodermic needleHypodermic needle
Hypodermic needle
 
Kommas pers
Kommas persKommas pers
Kommas pers
 
Pkt suku kajang
Pkt suku kajangPkt suku kajang
Pkt suku kajang
 
Etik umb Toward to be change
Etik umb Toward to be changeEtik umb Toward to be change
Etik umb Toward to be change
 
Etik umb Corruption
Etik umb CorruptionEtik umb Corruption
Etik umb Corruption
 
Berpikir positif etik umb
Berpikir positif etik umbBerpikir positif etik umb
Berpikir positif etik umb
 
Theory of communication
Theory of communication Theory of communication
Theory of communication
 
Phsycology of communication
Phsycology of communication Phsycology of communication
Phsycology of communication
 
Citizenship
CitizenshipCitizenship
Citizenship
 
Social knowledge
Social knowledgeSocial knowledge
Social knowledge
 
Religion
ReligionReligion
Religion
 
Pengantar ilmu komunikasi
Pengantar ilmu komunikasiPengantar ilmu komunikasi
Pengantar ilmu komunikasi
 
Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22
Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22
Kapita selekta ilmu sosial 22
 
Indonesia
IndonesiaIndonesia
Indonesia
 
Economy
EconomyEconomy
Economy
 
Application of computer
Application of computerApplication of computer
Application of computer
 

Ibu Rumah Tangga

  • 1. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 2. TV Introduction Programming Hasil Penelitian terhadap Audiens (Ibu-Ibu Rumah Tangga) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 3. Ines Ines Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Pratiwi Pratiwi Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. (44111010067) Type(44111010067) your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Type your text here. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 4. Penelitian Program Acara Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 5. Penelitian Penelitian Penelitian Demografi Kuantitatif Kualitatif Rating dan Share Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 6. Kategori Usia • Audiens RT 10 • Audiens RT 12 Kategori Pendapatan • Audiens RT 10 • Audiens RT 12 Kategori Pendidikan • Audiens RT 10 • Audiens RT 12 Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 7. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 8. Persentase Kategori Usia RT 10 4% 4% 16% 40% < 17 Tahun 17 – 25 Tahun 25 – 35 Tahun 35 – 45 Tahun > 45 Tahun 36% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 9. Persentase Kategori Usia RT 12 8% 16% 17 – 25 Tahun 48% 25 – 35 Tahun 35 – 45 Tahun > 45 Tahun 28% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 10. Perbandingan Kategori Antara Usia RT 10 dan RT 12 14 12 Jumlah Audiens 10 8 RT 10 6 12 RT 12 10 4 9 7 2 4 4 1 0 1 2 0 < 17 Tahun 17 – 25 Tahun 25 – 35 Tahun 35 – 45 Tahun > 45 Tahun Created by : Ines Pratiwi Usia
  • 11. Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori usia ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu 45 Tahun ke atas. Sedangkan usia terendah yaitu kisaran antara 17 – 35 tahun. 2. Kategori usia ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu 45 tahun ke atas. Sedangkan usia terendah yaitu usia dibawah 25 tahun ke bawah. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan usia antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan usia memiliki perbandingan yang berbeda tipis. Usia di bawah 17 dimiliki oleh sangat sedikit audiens. Dan di atas 45 tahun memiliki jumlah audiens yang paling besar. Kesimpulannya, hasil dari audiens terhadap ibu-ibu rumah tangga hanya memiliki usia yang relative sudah tua. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 12. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 13. Persentase Kategori Pendapatan RT 10 8% 20% 1 Juta – 4 Juta 5 Juta – 9 Juta Tidak Menentu 72% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 14. Persentase Kategori Pendapatan RT 12 20% 1 Juta – 4 Juta 5 Juta – 9 Juta 16% Tidak Menentu 64% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 15. Perbandingan Kategori Pendapatan 20 Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 18 16 Jumlah Audiens 14 12 10 RT 10 18 RT 12 8 16 6 4 2 5 4 5 2 0 1 Juta – 4 Juta 5 Juta – 9 Juta Tidak Menentu Created by : Ines Pratiwi Jumlah Pendapatan
  • 16. Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori pendapatan ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu 1 Juta – 4 Juta. Sedangkan pendapatan terendah yaitu tidak menentu (tergantung hasil penjualan). 2. Kategori pendapatan ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu 1 juta – 4 juta. Sedangkan pendapatan terendah yaitu 5 juta – 9 juta rupiah. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan pendapatan antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan pendapatan memiliki perbandingan yang berbeda tipis. Pendapatan RT 10 dengan RT 12 antara 5 juta – 9 juta dan tidak menentu memiliki perbandingan terbalik. Tidak menentu didominasi oleh RT 12 sedangkan 5 juta – 9 juta didominasi oleh RT 10. Sedangkan kisaran pendapatan antara 1 Juta – 4 Juta didominasi oleh RT 10 sebanyak 18 dan RT 12 sebanyak 16. Berarti dapat dikatakan ibu-ibu rumah tangga RT 10 dan RT 12 memilki penghasilan sebesar 1Juta – 4 juta. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 17. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 18. Persentase Kategori Pendidikan RT 10 4% 12% 24% SMP SMA D3 S1 60% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 19. Persentase Kategori Pendidikan RT 12 4% 12% 28% SD SMP SMA D3 S1 12% 44% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 20. Perbandingan Kategori Pendidikan Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 16 14 12 Jumlah Audiens 10 8 RT 10 15 RT 12 6 11 4 6 7 2 0 1 2 3 3 1 0 SD SMP SMA D3 S1 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Tingkat Pendidikan
  • 21. Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori pendidikan terakhir ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu tingkat SMU. Sedangkan pendidikan terakhir paling rendah yaitu S1 (Strata 1). 2. Kategori pendidikan terakhir ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu tingkat SMU. Sedangkan pendidikan terakhir paling rendah yaitu tingak SD. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan pendidikan antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang berbeda tipis. Tingkat SD dimiliki oleh sangat sedikit audiens. Dan tingkat SMA memiliki jumlah audiens yang paling besar. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki tingkat pendidikan yang masih dapat dikatakan relative rendah untuk era saat ini yaitu tingkat SMU. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 22. Program Favorite Program Favorite Acara Hiburan Acara Sinetron Stasiun TV Favorite Program Favorite Program Favorite Acara Ceramah Acara Infotainment Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 23. Program Favorite Acara Reality Show Program Favorite Acara Berita Lama Waktu Menonton Sering/ Jarang Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 24. Persentase Kategori Stasiun TV Favorite RT 10 16% 20% SCTV RCTI Indosiar 16% Metro TV TV One 20% TVRI 4% Trans TV Trans 7 12% 4% 8% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 25. Persentase Kategori Stasiun TV Favorite RT 12 8% 28% SCTV 20% RCTI ANTV METRO TV TRANS TV TRANS 7 16% 16% TV One 8% 4% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 26. Perbandingan Stasiun TV Favorite 8 Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 7 7 6 Jumlah Audiens 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 3 3 RT 10 2 2 2 RT 12 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 -1 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Stasiun TV
  • 27. Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori stasiun TV favorite ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu SCTV. Sedangkan stasiun TV favorite paling rendah yaitu indosiar dan TVRI. 2. Kategori stasiun TV favorite ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu SCTV. Sedangkan stasiun TV favorite paling rendah yaitu Antv. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan stasiun TV favorite antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang berbeda tipis karena keduanya didominasi oleh SCTV dan RCTI. 4. Pada RT 10 stasiun TV Antv tidak dimiliki audiens sebagai stasiun favorite, sedangkan di RT 12 stasun TV Indosiar tidak dimiliki audiens sebagai stasiun favorite. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu- ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki stasiun TV Favorite terhadap SCTV yang memiliki program acara umum termasuk sinetron dan berita. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 28. Rating Penonton TV SCTV = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Penonton TV RCTI = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Penonton TV Indosiar = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton TV Metro TV = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton TV One = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton TV TVRI = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton TV Trans TV = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton TV Trans 7 = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Share Share TV SCTV = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Share TV RCTI = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Share TV Indosiar = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Share TV Metro TV = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Share TV One = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Share TV TVRI = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Share TV Trans TV = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Share TV Trans 7 = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% (Nb : Global TV, MNC TV, dan Antv tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 29. Rating Penonton TV SCTV = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Penonton TV RCTI = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton TV Antv = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton TV Metro TV = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton TV Trans TV = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton TV Trans 7 = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Penonton TV One = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Share Share TV SCTV = 7 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 28% Share TV RCTI = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Share TV Antv = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Share TV Metro TV = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Share TV Trans TV = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Share TV Trans 7 = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Share TV One = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% (Nb : Global TV, MNC TV, TVRI dan Indosiar tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 30. Persentase Kategori Waktu Menonton Audiens RT 10 20% Pagi Hari 28% Siang Hari Sore Hari Malam Hari 24% 12% Larut Malam 16% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 31. Persentase Kategori Waktu Menonton Audiens RT 12 8% 28% Pagi Hari Siang Hari Malam Hari 8% Larut Malam 56% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 32. Perbandingan Waktu Menonton Audiens Antara RT 10 dan 12 16 14 14 12 12 Jumlah Audiens 10 8 7 RT 10 6 RT 12 4 4 4 3 2 2 2 0 0 Pagi Hari Siang Hari Sore Hari Malam Hari Larut Malam -2 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Waktu Menonton
  • 33. Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori waktu menonton ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu waktu malam hari. Sedangkan waktu menonton paling rendah yaitu waktu siang hari. 2. Kategori waktu menonton ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu malam hari. Sedangkan waktu menonton paling rendah yaitusiang hari dan larut malam. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan waktu menonton antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang sama karena keduanya didominasi oleh waktu menonton di malam hari dan minimnya saat siang hari. 4. Pada RT 12 waktu menonton di sore hari tidak dimiliki audiens, sedangkan di RT 10 ada. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki waktu menonton di malam hari karena berkaitan dengan waktu prime time sekitar pukul 19.00 WIB – 22.00 WIB. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 34. Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Sinetron RT 10 28% Tukang Bubur Naik Haji Love in Paris 60% Lain-lain 12% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 35. Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Sinetron RT 12 4% 4% Cinta Fitri 36% Ketika Cinta Bertasbih Tukang Bubur Naik Haji 40% Love in Paris Lain-lain 16% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 36. Perbandingan Program Favorit Acara Sinetron Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 16 15 14 12 Jumlah Audiens 10 10 9 8 7 RT 10 6 RT 12 4 4 3 2 1 1 0 0 0 Cinta Fitri Ketika Cinta Tukang Bubur Love in Paris Lain - lain -2 Bertasbih Naik Haji Created by : Ines Pratiwi Judul Sinetron
  • 37. Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori Program Favorite Acara Sinetron ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 dan RT 12 yaitu Tukang Bubur Naik Haji sebesar 60% dan 40%. Sedangkan waktu menonton paling rendah di RT 10 yaitu Love in Paris dan di RT 12 yaitu Cinta Fitri sekaligus Ketika Cinta Bertasbih. 2. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan Program Favorite Acara Sinetron antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang hamper sama karena keduanya didominasi oleh Tukang Bubur Naik Haji dan dilanjutkan ke yang lain-lain (Nama program acara tidak tertera di quesioner dari seluruh program acara yang tertera sebelumnya). Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu- ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki Program Favorite Acara Sinetron Tukang Bubur Naik Haji karena berkaitan dengan waktu prime time sekitar pukul 19.00 WIB serta waktu santai/senggang selain itu karena acaranya bagus. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 38. Rating Penonton Tukang Bubur Naik Haji = 15 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 30% Penonton Love in Paris = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Share Penonton Tukang Bubur Naik Haji = 15 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 60% Penonton Love in Paris = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 7 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 28% (Nb : Cinta Fitri, Putri Kembar,dan Ketika Cinta Bertasbih tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 39. Rating Penonton Tukang Bubur Naik Haji = 10 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 20% Penonton Love in Paris = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Cinta Fitri = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton Ketika Cinta Bertasbih = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 9 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 18% Share Penonton Tukang Bubur Naik Haji = 10 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 40% Penonton Love in Paris = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Penonton Cinta Fitri = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Ketika Cinta Bertasbih = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 9 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 36% (Nb : Putri Kembar tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 40. Persentase Program Favorite Acara Infotainment RT 10 8% 16% Intens 36% Silet Kiss 4% Selebrita Insert Lain-lain 12% 24% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 41. Persentase Program Favorit Acara Infotainment RT 12 24% 28% Silet Insert Lain-lain 48% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 42. Perbandingan Kategori Program Favorit Acara Infotainment Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 14 12 12 10 Jumlah Audiens 9 8 7 6 6 6 RT 10 RT 12 4 4 3 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 Intens Silet Kiss Selebrita Insert Lain-lain -2 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Nama Infotainment
  • 43. Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori program favorite acara infotainment ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu lain-lain (Nama program acara tidak tertera di quesioner dari seluruh program acara yang tertera sebelumnya) sebanyak 36% lalu dilanjutkan dengan insert sebanyak 24%. Sedangkan program favorite acara infotainment paling rendah yaitu Kiss. 2. Kategori program favorite acara infotainment ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu insert sebanyak 48%. Sedangkan paling rendah program favorite acara infotainment yaitu lain-lain. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan program favorite acara infotainment antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang jauh karena keduanya memiliki garis grafik dengan bentuk berbeda. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki program favorite acara infotainment didominasi oleh Insert karena kualitasnya lebih baik. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 44. Rating Penonton Intens = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Silet = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Kiss = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton Selebrita = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Insert = 6 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Acara infotainment Lainnya = 9 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 18% Share Penonton Intens = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Silet = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Penonton Kiss = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Selebrita = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Insert = 6 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 24% Penonton Acara infotainment Lainnya = 9 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 36% (Nb : Selebrita Punya Story tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 45. Rating Penonton Silet = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Penonton Insert = 12 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 24% Penonton Acaara infotainment Lainnya = 6 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 12% Share Penonton Silet = 7 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 28% Penonton Insert = 12 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 48% Penonton Acara infotainment Lainnya = 6 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 24% (Nb : Kiss, Selebrita, Selebrita Punya Story, Intens, tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 46. Persentase Program Favorite Acara Ceramah RT 10 8% 28% Wisata Hati Islam itu Indah Chatting Bareng YM Lain-lain 44% 20% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 47. Persentase Program Favorite Acara Ceramah RT 12 12% 8% 12% 12% Kata Ustad Solmed Wisata Hati Islam itu Indah Chatting bersama YM Lain-lain 56% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 48. Perbandingan Kategori Program Favorite Acara Ceramah 16 Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 14 14 12 11 Jumlah Audiens 10 8 7 RT 10 6 5 RT 12 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 0 0 Kata Ustad Wisata Hati Islam Itu Chatting Lain-lain Solmed Indah Bareng YM Created by : Ines Pratiwi Nama Program Ceramah
  • 49. Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori program favorite acara ceramah ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 dan RT 12 yaitu Islam itu Indah sebanyak 36% dan 56%. Sedangkan program favorite acara ceramah paling rendah di RT 10 yakni Wisata Hati dan paling rendah di RT 12 yaitu Kata Ustad Solmed. 2. Kategori program favorite acara ceramah ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu insert sebanyak 48%. Sedangkan paling rendah program favorite acara infotainment yaitu lain-lain. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan program favorite acara ceramah antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang hampir sama karena keduanya memiliki garis grafik dengan bentuk garis memuncak dibagian tengahnya. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki program favorite acara ceramah didominasi oleh Islam Itu Indah karena program tersebut menghibur sekaligus waktu tayang setelah shubuh (di pagi hari). Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 50. Rating Penonton Wisata Hati = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Islam Itu Indah = 11 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 22% Penonton Chatting Bareng YM = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Penonton Acara ceramah Lainnya = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Share Penonton Wisata Hati = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Islam Itu Indah = 11 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 44% Penonton Chatting Bareng YM = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 6 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 24% (Nb : Ass Ustad, dan Kata Ustad Solmed tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 51. Rating Penonton Kata Ustad Solmed = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Wisata Hati = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Islam Itu Indah = 14 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 28% Penonton Chatting Bareng YM = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Acara ceramah Lainnya = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Share Penonton Kata Ustad Solmed = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Wisata Hati = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Islam Itu Indah = 14 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 56% Penonton Chatting Bareng YM = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Acara Sinetron Lainnya = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% (Nb : Ass Ustad tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 52. Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Berita RT 10 4% 16% Buletin Indonesia Reportase Redaksi 12% 36% Headline News Fokus 4% Liputan 6 Lain-lain 24% 4% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 53. Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Berita RT 12 4% 4% 4% 4% Live News 16% Buletin Indonesia Reportase Redaksi Headline News Liputan 6 44% 20% Fokus Lain-lain 4% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 54. Perbandingan Kategori Program Favorite Acara Berita Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 12 11 10 9 Jumlah Audiens 8 6 6 5 RT 10 4 4 3 3 RT12 2 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 -2 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Nama Program Berita
  • 55. • Kategori program favorite acara berita ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 dan RT 12 yaitu Reportase sebanyak 36% dan 44%. Sedangkan paling rendah di RT 10 dan RT 12 yaitu Buletin Indonesia, Fokus dan One Redaksi. • Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan program favorite acara berita antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang hampir sama karena keduanya Two memiliki garis grafik dengan bentuk garis bergelombang dari tertinggi hingga terendah. • Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki program favorite acara berita yang didominasi oleh Reportase karena program tersebut lebih bervariasi Three sekaligus waktu tayang senggang. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 56. • Penonton Buletin Indonesia = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% • Penonton Reportase = 9 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 18% • Penonton Redaksi = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% • Penonton Headline News = 6 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 12% • Penonton Fokus = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Rating • Penonton Liputan 6 = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% • Penonton Acara Berita Lainnya= 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% •Penonton Buletin Indonesia = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% • Penonton Reportase = 9 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 36% • Penonton Redaksi = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% • Penonton Headline News = 6 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 24% • Penonton Fokus = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Share • Penonton Liputan 6 = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% • Penonton Acara Berita Lainnya= 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% (Nb : Live News dan Lintas tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 57. • Penonton Live News = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% • Penonton Buletin Indonesia = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% • Penonton Reportase = 11 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 22% • Penonton Redaksi = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% • Penonton Headline News = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Rating • Penonton Fokus • Penonton Liputan 6 = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% • Penonton Acara Berita Lainnya= 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% •Penonton Live News = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% • Penonton Buletin Indonesia = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% • Penonton Reportase = 11 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 44% • Penonton Redaksi = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% • Penonton Headline News = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Share • Penonton Fokus • Penonton Liputan 6 = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% • Penonton Acara Berita Lainnya= 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% (Nb : Lintas tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 58. Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Hiburan RT 10 4% 4% 20% Dahsyat Awas Ada Sule Opera Van Java 12% Pesbukers Lain-lain 60% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 59. Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Hiburan RT 12 12% 4% Dahsyat Awas Ada Sule Opera Van Java 84% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 60. Perbandingan Kategori Program Favorite Acara Hiburan Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 25 20 21 Jumlah Audiens 15 15 RT 10 10 RT12 5 5 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 Dahsyat Awas Ada Sule Opera Van Pesbukers Lain-lain Java -5 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Nama Program Hiburan
  • 61. Berdasarkan hasil penelitian melalui total kuesioner sebanyak 25 untuk RT 10 dan 25 untuk RT 12, menimbang bahwa : 1. Kategori program favorite acara hiburan ibu- ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 dan RT 12 yaitu OVJ sebesar 60% dan 84%. Sedangkan paling rendah keduanya yaitu Awas Ada Sule. 2. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan program favorite acara hiburan antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang hampir sama karena keduanya memiliki garis grafik dengan bentuk memuncak di bagian tengahnya. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 dan RT 12 memiliki program favorite acara hiburan yang didominasi oleh OVJ karena program tersebut dinilai sangat menarik, lucu, baik, menghibur dan waktu tayang yang tepat dengan waktu istirahat ibu- ibu rumah tangga. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 62. Rating Stasiun TV Penonton Dahsyat = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton Awas Ada Sule = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton OVJ = 15 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 30% Penonton Pesbukers = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Acara Hiburan Lain= 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Share Stasiun TV Penonton Dahsyat = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Awas Ada Sule = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton OVJ = 15 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 60% Penonton Pesbukers = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Acara Hiburan Lain= 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% (Nb : Inbox, dan KLIK! tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 63. Rating Stasiun TV Penonton Dahsyat = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Awas Ada Sule = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton OVJ = 21 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 30% Share Stasiun TV Penonton Dahsyat = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Awas Ada Sule = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton OVJ = 21 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 84% (Nb : Inbox, Pesbukers, dan KLIK! tidak ada yang memilih dalam isi kuesioner) Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 64. Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Reality Show RT 10 12% Indonesia Idol 28% Take Me Out 8% Super Trap Indonesia Mencari Bakat 24% Lain-lain 28% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 65. Persentase Kategori Program Favorite Acara Reality Show RT 12 16% Indonesia Idol 20% Take Me Out Termehek-Mehek 12% Uya Emang Kuya Super Trap 8% Indonesia Mencari 40% 4% Bakat Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 66. Perbandingan Kategori Program Favorite Acara Reality Show Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 12 10 10 Jumlah Audiens 8 7 7 6 6 RT 10 5 RT12 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 1 0 0 0 0 Indonesian Take Me Termehek Uya Super Indonesia Lain-lain -2 Idol Out Emang Trap Mencari Kuya Bakat Created by : Ines Pratiwi Nama Program Reality Show
  • 67. Kategori program favorite acara reality show ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu IMB sebanyak 28% Sedangkan paling rendah yaituTake Me Out. Kategori program favorite acara reality show ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu Super Trap sebanyak 40%. Sedangkan paling rendah program favorite acara Reality Show yaitu Uya Emang Kuya. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan program favorite acara Reality Show antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang relative berbeda karena keduanya memiliki garis peningkatan berbeda di bagian akhirnya. ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 memiliki program favorite acara Reality Show yaitu IMB dan RT 12 memiliki program favorite acara Reality Show yang didominasi oleh Super Trap karena program tersebut dinilai sangat menarik, menghibur dan waktu tayang yang tepat dengan waktu istirahat ibu-ibu rumah tangga. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 68. Rating Penonton Indonesian Idol = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Take Me Out = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Super Trap = 6 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton IMB = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Penonton Acara Hiburan Lainnya = 7 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 14% Share Penonton Indonesian Idol = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Take Me Out = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Super Trap = 6 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 24% Penonton IMB = 7 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 28% Penonton Acara Hiburan Lainnya = 7 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 28% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 69. Rating Penonton Indonesian Idol = 4 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Take Me Out = 3 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 6% Penonton Termehek-mehek = 2 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Uya Emang Kuya = 1 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 2% Penonton Super Trap = 10 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 20% Penonton IMB = 5 Orang / 50 orang X 100% = 10% Share Penonton Indonesian Idol = 4 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 16% Penonton Take Me Out = 3 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 12% Penonton Termehek-mehek = 2 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 8% Penonton Uya Emang Kuya = 1 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 4% Penonton Super Trap = 10 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 40% Penonton IMB = 5 Orang / 25 orang X 100% = 20% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 70. Persentase Kategori Lama Waktu Menonton Audiens RT 10 20% 28% 10 – 15 Menit 15 – 20 Menit 20 – 25 Menit 25 – 30 Menit 24% > 30 Menit 12% 16% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 71. Persentase Kategori Lama Waktu Menonton Audiens RT 12 12% 8% 10 - 15 menit 48% 8% 15 - 20 menit 20 - 25 menit 25 - 30 menit > 30 menit 24% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 72. Perbandingan Kategori Lama Waktu Menonton Audiens Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 14 12 12 Jumlah Audiens 10 8 7 6 6 RT 10 5 RT12 4 4 3 3 2 2 2 0 10 - 15 menit 15 - 20 menit 20 - 25 menit 25 - 30 menit > 30 menit Created by : Ines Pratiwi Lama Waktu
  • 73. Created by : Ines Pratiwi :10 1. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Kategori lama waktu menonton ibu-ibu rumah tangga tertinggi di RT 10 yaitu 10 – 15 menit sebanyak 28% Sedangkan paling rendah yaitu 15 – 20 menit. 2. Kategori lama waktu menonton ibu-ibu rumah tangga selaku audiens tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu lebih dari 30 menit sebanyak 48%. Sedangkan paling rendah yaitu 15 – 25 menit. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan lama waktu menonton ibu-ibu rumah tangga antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa peningkatan keduanya memiliki perbandingan yang sangat berbeda karena keduanya memiliki garislekukan yang selalu Kesimpulan berbeda naik turunnya. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga memiliki lama waktu menonton di RT 10 yaitu didominasi oleh 15 – 20 menit (biasa disebut low viewer) karena sibuk melakukan aktivitas dibandingkan dengan menonton TV seberjam-jam. Berbeda dengan audiens RT 12 didominasi lebih dari 30 menit (disebut high viewer) karena waktu istirahat sangat banyak.
  • 74. Persentase Kategori Sering/Jarang Menonton TV RT 10 12% 28% Sering KadangKala Jarang 60% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 75. Persentase Kategori Sering/Jarang Menonton TV RT 12 20% 44% Sering Kadangkala Jarang 36% Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 76. Perbandingan Kategori Sering/Jarang Menonton TV Antara RT 10 dan RT 12 16 15 14 12 Jumlah Audiens 11 10 9 8 RT 10 7 RT12 6 5 4 3 2 0 Created by : Ines Pratiwi Sering Kadangkala Jarang
  • 77. Kesimpulan 1. Kategori Sering/Jarang menonton Televisi audiens (ibu-ibu rumah tangga) tertinggi kadangkala menontonnya sebanyak 60% Sedangkan paling rendah yaitu jarang menonton. 2. Kategori Sering/Jarang menonton Televisi audiens (ibu-ibu rumah tangga) tertinggi di RT 12 yaitu sering menonton sebanyak 44%. Sedangkan paling rendah yaitu jarang menonton. 3. Hasil survey tehadap grafik di atas yakni perbandingan Sering/Jarang menonton Televisi audiens (ibu-ibu rumah tangga) antara RT 10 dan RT 12 dapat disimpulkan bahwa perbandingan keduanya memiliki garis yang sangat jauh berbeda. Jika RT 12 memiliki garis menyerupai garis lurus sedikit melengkung ke bawah sedangkan RT 10 memiliki garis berupa lengkungan ke atas di bagian tengahnya. Kesimpulan terhadap grafik tersebut menunjukkan bahwasanya ibu-ibu rumah tangga di RT 10 tidak begitu sering menonton dan RT 12 lebih sering menonton. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 78. Penelitian Kualitatif Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 79. Program acara sinetron saat ini sudah bagus dan baik-baik saja. Namun beberapa dari mereka beranggapan sinetron saat ini kurang mendidik dan lebih kearah negative buat masyarakat. Perkembangan televisi saat ini juga dinilai oleh ibu-ibu rumah tangga semakin bagus, sebagian ada unsur mendidik/edukatif dan memberikan banyak pengetahuan seperti Trans TV dan Trans 7. Tanggapan ibu-ibu rumah tangga terhadap program acara infotainment yakni lebih banyak yang menjawab kurang baik dan kurang menyukai sebab banyak memberikan isu-isu negative tentang selebritis di Indonesia. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 80. Jadi pada intinya, program acara sinetron saat ini dinilai kurang mendidik, banyak adegan kekerasan, dan dinilai membawa pengaruh negative khususnya buat anak-anak karena beberapa perkataan kasar seringkali diucapkan. Jika perkembangan televisi saat ini sudah dinilai semakin bagus karena selalu ada perkembangan dengan menampilkan program acara berkualitas dan lebih baik dari yang sebelumnya. Sedangkan, perasaan ibu-ibu rumah tangga setelah menonton program acara yang mereka tonton yaitu merasa senang, puas, dan beberapa menyatakan bisa menghilangkan sedikit stress serta menambah wawasan. Namun, tanggapan mereka terhadap infotainment dinilai kurang baik karena menyebarkan isu-isu negative dan bisa membuat kita menjadi orang negative pula. Pada dasarnya, ibu-ibu memilih waktu menonton pada waktu malam hari karena waktu santai atau istirahat jadi tidak terbebani pikiran dan pekerjaan lainnya. Terkahir, hal ini sangat disayangkan, mengapa? Karena ibu-ibu sekarang lebih cenderung menaruh tingkat perhatian terhadap apa-apa yang ditontonnya yakni biasa saja. Mereka hanya ingin menikmati masa-masa santai dan mendapatkan hiburan maupun pengetahuan sekilas Created by : Ines Pratiwi saja tanpa ingin ditelaah dan diteliti terlebih dahulu.
  • 81. Media massa seringkali mempersuasi orang lain dengan berita-berita baru. Hambatannya yaitu tidak semua orang mampu menganggap informasi yang disampaikan tersebut penting, sehingga efektifitas persuasi bisa menjadi lebih efektif atau bahkan tidak sama sekali. Untuk itu, harus lebih ditinjau lagi dan diperlihatkan lagi aspek positifnya dalam menayangkan program acara. Statement or Sebagai broadcaster, seharusnya kita mengenal terlebih dahulu apa saja selera audiens dilingkungan kita sebelum kita menciptakan suatu program acara caption diterima oleh agar dapat masyarakat yang memiliki perbedaan budaya atau kebiasaan sekalipun. Sebab, keuntungan program acara kita terletak pada seberapa besar pilihan audiens. Jika kita mendapatkan jumlah penonton yang banyak, maka penghasilan untuk pemasukan kita menyuguhkan acara tersebut lebih meningkat dan lebih berhasil. Created by : Ines Pratiwi
  • 82. Created by : Ines Pratiwi

Editor's Notes

  1. Custom animation effects: rotating characters on a curved path(Intermediate)Tip: To draw the curved line on this slide, you will need to use the ruler and the drawing guides.To display the ruler and the drawing guides, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position.)To reproduce the curved line on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Curve (10th option from the left). To draw the curved line on the slide, do the following:Click the first point 0.25” to the left of the left edge of the slide and 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide.Click the second point 3” to the left of the vertical drawing guide and 1” above the horizontal drawing guide.Click the third point 1.5” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and 0.5” below the horizontal drawing guide.Double-click the fourth and final point 0.25” to the right of the right edge of the slide and 1.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. Select the curved line. UnderDrawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Outline, and then do the following: Under Theme Colors,clickWhite, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left). Point to Dashes, and then click Square Dot (third option from the top).Point to Weight, and then click 1 ½ pt. To reproduce the “1” on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw the text box.Enter 1 in the text box, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select Impact.In the Font Size box, enter 140.On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left in the text box. Select the text box. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the WordArt Styles group, click the Format Text Effects dialog box launcher. In the Format Text Effects dialog box, click Text Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Text Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 50%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 85%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 0%.Also in the Format Text Effects dialog box, click Text Outline in the left pane. In the Text Outline pane, select Solid line, click the button next to Color, and then click More Colors. In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 49, Green: 133, Blue: 156.Also in the Format Text Effects dialog box, click Outline Style in the left pane. In the Outline Style pane, in the Width box, enter 2.5 pt. Also in the Format Text Effects dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click Offset Diagonal Bottom Left (first row, third option from the left), and then do the following:In the Transparency box, enter 82%.In the Size box, enter 100%.In the Blur box, enter 8 pt.In the Angle box, enter 135°.In the Distance box, enter 30 pt. Also in the Format Text Effects dialog box, click 3-D Rotation in the left pane. In the 3-D Rotation pane, under Rotation, in the Z box, enter 15°.UnderDrawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click Text Effects, point to Glow, and then under Glow Variations click Accent color 1, 8 pt glow (second row, first option from the left).UnderDrawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click Text Effects, point to Glow, point to More Glow Colors, and then click More Colors. In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 29, Green: 199, Blue: 244.Drag the text box onto the left part of the curved line, slightly to the right of the peak of the curve. To reproduce the animation effects for the “1” on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click Custom Animation.On the slide, select the text box. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Subtle, click Fade. Select the animation effect (fade effect for the text box). Under Modify: Fade, do the following:In theStart list, selectWith Previous. In the Speed list, select Fast.On the slide, select the text box. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Emphasis, and then click More Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Spin. Select the second animation effect (spin effect for the text box). Click the arrow to the right of the selected effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Spin dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, do the following:In the Amount list, in the Custom box, enter 30°, and then press ENTER.Select Clockwise.Select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, do the following:In theStart list, selectWith Previous. In the Speed list, select 1 seconds (Fast).On the slide, select the text box. In the CustomAnimation task pane, click AddEffect, point to Motion Paths,point to Draw Custom Path,and then click Curve. On the slide, click the first point of the motion path in the middle of the text box, and then click three or four more points to the right along the dashed curved line. Double-click the last point off the right side of the slide. (Note: Click at least 1.5” off the right edge of the slide so that the text and its shadow exit completely.)In the Custom Animation taskpane, select the third animation effect (custom motion path for the “1” text box). Under Modify: Custom Path, do the following:In theStart box, selectWith Previous. In the Speed box, select Medium.On the slide, right-click the motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction.On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, clear Ruler.Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, clear Display drawing guides on screen. To reproduce the animated “2” on this slide, do the following:Select the first text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.Click in the second text box, delete 1, and then enter 2.Select the second text box. UnderDrawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the WordArt Styles group, click the FormatTextEffects dialog box launcher. In the Format Text Effects dialog box, click Text Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Text Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 50%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 85%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 198, Green: 217, Blue: 241.In the Transparency box, enter 0%.Also in the Format Text Effects dialog box, click Text Outline in the left pane. In the Text Outline pane, select Solid line, click the button next to Color, and then click More Colors. In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 228, Green: 108, Blue: 10.Also in the Format Text Effects dialog box, click 3-D Rotation in the left pane. In the 3-D Rotation pane, under Rotation, in the Z box, enter 350°.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click Text Effects, point to Glow, point to More Glow Colors, and then click More Colors. In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 255, Green: 144, Blue: 4.Drag the second text box onto the curved line, to the right of the “1” text box and approximately in the middle of the slide. In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Press and hold CTRL, and then select the fourth and fifth animation effects (fade and spin effects for the second text box). Click the arrow next to one of the selected effects, and then click Timing. In the Effect Options dialog box, on the Timing tab, do the following:In the Delay box, enter 0.5.In the Speed box, enter 0.9 seconds. Select the sixth animation effect (motion path for the second text box). Click the arrow next to the selected effect, and then click Timing. in the Custom Path dialog box, on the Timing tab, do the following:In the Delay box, enter 0.5.In the Speed box, enter 1.8 seconds. In the Custom Animation task pane, select the sixth animation effect. On the slide, right-click the selected motion path, and then click Edit Points. Drag the points on the path to match the path to the curved line. (Note: The starting point will be further to the right of the right edge of the slide than the starting point for the first motion path.)To reproduce the animated “3” on this slide, do the following:On the slide, select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.Drag the third text box away from the second text box.Click in the third text box, delete 2, and then enter 3. Select the third text box. UnderDrawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the WordArt Styles group, click the FormatTextEffects dialog box launcher. In the Format Text Effects dialog box, click Text Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Text Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 50%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 85%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 198, Green: 217, Blue: 241.In the Transparency box, enter 0%.Also in the Format Text Effects dialog box, click Text Outline in the left pane. In the Text Outline pane, select Solid line, click the button next to Color, and then click More Colors. In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 119, Green: 147, Blue: 60.Also in the Format Text Effects dialog box, click 3-D Rotation in the left pane. In the 3-D Rotation pane, under Rotation, in the Z box, enter 5°.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click Text Effects, point to Glow, point to More Glow Colors, and then click More Colors. In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 168, Green: 224, Blue: 52.Drag the third text box to the right of the second text box, above the curve.In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Select the seventh animation effect (fade effect for the third text box). Click the arrow next to the selected effect, and then click Timing. In the Fade dialog box, on the Timing tab, do the following:In the Delay box, enter 0.9.In the Speed box, enter 0.7 seconds. Select the eighth animation effect (spin effect for the third text box). Click the arrow next to the selected effect, and then click Timing. In the Spin dialog box, on the Timing tab, do the following:In the Delay box, enter 0.9.In the Speed box, enter 0.75 seconds. Select the ninth animation effect (motion path for the third text box). Click the arrow next to the selected effect, and then click Timing. In the Spin dialog box, on the Timing tab, do the following:In the Delay box, enter 0.9.In the Speed box, enter 1.5 seconds. Also in the Custom Animation task pane, select the ninth animation effect (motion path for the third text box). On the slide, right-click the selected motion path, and then click Edit Points. Drag the points on the path to match the path to the curved line. (Note: The endpoint will be above the curved line and from there the path will eventually meet the curve. The starting point will be further to the right of the right edge of the slide than the starting point for the first motion path.)To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Corner (fifth option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left).
  2. Custom animation effects: open book (Difficult)Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides.In the Grid and Guides dialog box, underGuidesettings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce thefirst shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle.Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”.In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”.On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners.On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 0°. Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Red, Accent 2, Darker 25%(fifth row, sixth option from the left).Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click LineColor in the left pane. In the LineColor pane, select Noline.Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click 3-DFormat in the left pane, and then in the 3-DFormat pane, do the following:Under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under Bevel click Circle (first row, first option from the left). Next to Top, in the Width box, enter 4 pt, and in the Height box, enter 4 pt.Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Standard click WarmMatte (second option from the left).Also under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral, click ThreePoint (first row, first option from the left).On the slide, drag the rounded rectangle until the left edge is against thevertical drawing guide.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.To reproduce thesecond shape in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then clickDuplicate.On the slide, drag the duplicate rectangle untilthe left edge is against the vertical drawing guide.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:ClickAlign to Slide. Click Align Middle.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”.On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 180°.Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickBlack, Text 1(first row, second option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 50%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickBlack, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 100%.Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click 3-DFormat in the left pane. In the 3-D Format pane, under Bevel, click the button next to Top, and then under NoBevel click None.To reproduce thethird shape (first small rectangle on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following:Select the first, larger rectangle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.Select the third, duplicate rectangle.Under Drawing tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.08”. In the Shape Width box, enter 0.73”.On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 135°.Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click 3-DFormat in the left pane, and then in the 3-D Format pane, do the following:Under Bevel, next to Top, in the Width box, enter 3 pt, and in the Height box, enter 3 pt.Under Surface, click the button next to Lighting, and then under Neutral click Soft (first row, third option from the left).To reproduce therest of the shapes (other small rectangles on the book spine) in the Book cover group on this slide, do the following:Select the third, smaller rectangle.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of four thin, rounded rectangles. To position the four thin, rounded rectangles on the book spine, do the following:Drag the first rectangle 1.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide.Drag the second rectangle 0.75” above the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide.Drag the third rectangle 0.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide.Drag the fourth rectangle 1.75” below the horizontal drawing guide, with the left edge touching the vertical drawing guide.On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click SelectAll.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane.On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Book cover. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left pagesgroup on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”.In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”.On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to decrease the amount of rounding on the corners. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 180°. Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Red Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left).Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click LineColor in the left pane. In the LineColor pane, select No line.On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical guideline.On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left pages group on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab,in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”.In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”.On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 180°. Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until five stops appear in the drop-down list. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 5%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 18%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left).Select Stop 4 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 38%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 5 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 93%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click LineColor in the left pane. In the LineColor pane, select Noline.Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click OffsetRight (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following:In the Transparency box, enter 60%.In the Size box, enter 100%.In the Blur box, enter 4 pt.In the Angle box, enter 0°.In the Distance box, enter 3 pt.On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge touches the vertical drawing guide.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.Press and hold CTRL, and then in the Selection and Visibility pane, select the rectangle and the rounded rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.In the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left pages.To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following:In the SelectionandVisibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click MoreRotationOptions. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°.In the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages.On the slide, drag the rectangle until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide.On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:ClickAlign to Slide.ClickAlign Middle. To reproduce the text effects in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. (Note: To reproduce the example above, enter Introduction.) On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select Vivaldi.In the Font Size list, select 18.On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box.On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 1” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right pages with text group, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line.Select the line.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under ThemeColors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines.On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibilitypane, press and hold CTRL, and then select all six straight connectors (lines).On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Point to Align, and then clickAlign Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then clickDistribute Horizontally. Point to Align, and then click Align Middle.Click Group.On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.In the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right pages group.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group.In the Selection and Visibilitypane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right pages with text.To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Bring to Front.In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click BringForward.On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Book cover group. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Exit, and then click MoreEffects. In the AddExitEffect dialog box, under Moderate, click Collapse.Select the animation effect, and then under Modify: Collapse,do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Direction list, select ToLeft.In the Speed list, select Fast.In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left pages group. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the AddEntranceEffect dialog box, under Moderate, click Stretch.Select the second animation effect, and then under Modify: Stretch,do the following:In the Start list, select AfterPrevious.In the Direction list, select FromRight.In the Speed list, select Fast. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 63%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color list, and then under Theme Colors clickBlack, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).
  3. Custom animation effects: page turns in open book(Difficult)Tip: You will need to use drawing guides and the ruler to position the objects on this slide. For instructions on animating an opening book cover, refer to the previous slide (Custom animation effects: open book) for instructions.To display the drawing guides and the ruler, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides.In the Grid and Guides dialog box, underGuidesettings, select Display drawing guides on screen. (Note: One horizontal and one vertical guide will display on the slide at 0.00, the default position. The spine of the book will be aligned to the vertical drawing guide.) On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left page 1 group on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Rounded Rectangle (second option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle.Select the rounded rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 4.5”.In the Shape Width box, enter 3.33”.On the rounded rectangle, drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle to the left to reduce the amount of rounding on the corners.On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of theDrawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 180°.Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickRed Accent 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, sixth option from the left).Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click LineColor in the left pane. In the LineColor pane, select Noline. On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical drawing guide.On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.To reproduce the second shape in the Inside-left page 1 group on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab,in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left).On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”.In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”.On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of theDrawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 180°.Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until five stops appear in the drop-down list. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, the first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 5%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 18%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left).Select Stop 4 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 38%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 5 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 93%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click LineColor in the left pane. In the LineColor pane, select Noline.Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next toPresets, under Outer click OffsetRight (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following:In the Transparency box, enter 60%.In the Size box, enter 100%.In the Blur box, enter 4 pt.In the Angle box, enter 0°.In the Distance box, enter 3 pt.On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select and then click SelectAll.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. In the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left page 1. To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right page 3group on this slide, do the following:On the SelectionandVisibility pane, select the Inside-left page 1group.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click MoreRotationOptions. In the SizeandPosition dialog box, on the Size tab, under Sizeandrotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°.On the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the duplicate group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right.On the slide, drag theInside-right group until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.To reproduce the text box in the Inside-right page 3group on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw the text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select Bodoni MT Condensed.In the Font Size list, select 16.Drag the text box onto the right-side page to the right of the vertical drawing guide. If the text is wider than the page, drag the adjustment handles on the text box to decrease the width, and then repeat the previous step to reposition. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right page 3group on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line.Select the vertical line.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow to the right of Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process until there is a total of six lines.On the slide, drag the lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the six straight connectors (lines).On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, andthen do the following:Point to Align, and then click Align Selected Objects. Point to Align, and then click Distribute Horizontally.Point to Align, and then click Align Middle.Click Group. On the slide, drag the group of lines until the right edge is touching the right edge of the white rectangle to the right of the vertical drawing guide.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.In the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the group of lines, the text box, and the Inside-right group.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.In the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right page 3.To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left page 2group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab,in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left).On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 4.33”.In the Shape Width box, enter 3.15”.On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of theDrawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 180°.Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until five stops appear in the drop-down list. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickWhite, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 5%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickWhite, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 18%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickWhite, Background 1, Darker 5% (second row, first option from the left).Select Stop 4 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 38%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickWhite, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 5 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 93%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickWhite, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click LineColor in the left pane. In the LineColor pane, select Noline.Also in the FormatShape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Outer click OffsetRight (second row, first option from the left), and then do the following:In the Transparency box, enter 60%.In the Size box, enter 100%.In the Blur box, enter 4 pt.In the Angle box, enter 0°.In the Distance box, enter 3 pt.On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical drawing guide.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.To reproduce the page edge in the Inside-left page 2group on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left). On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line.Select the vertical line.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 4.32”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).On the slide, drag the line near the edge of the left-side page (white rectangle to the left of the vertical drawing guide). On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.In the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the rectangle and the straight connector (line).On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group.In the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left page 2.To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right page 2group on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left page 2 group.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then clickDuplicate.With the duplicate group still selected, on the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°.In the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the duplicate group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right.In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the new Inside-right group. On the slide, drag the selected group until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide.On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.ClickAlign Middle. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture.In the InsertPicture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Sizeand Position dialog box launcher. Select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, resize or crop the picture as needed so that under Size and rotate, the Height box is set to 1.4” and the Width box is set to 2.1”. Resize the picture under Size and rotate by entering values into the Height and Width boxes. Crop the picture under Crop from by entering values into the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom boxes. On the slide, drag the picture until the left edge is 0.5” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide.To reproduce the text boxin the Inside-right page 2group on this slide, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw the text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select Bodoni MT Condensed.In the Font Size list, select 16.On the slide, drag the text box untilthe left edge of the textis 0.5” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the top edge of the text is against the horizontal drawing guide.If the text is too wide for the page, drag the adjustment handles on the text box to adjust the width, and then repeat the previous step to reposition. To reproduce the page edgesin the Inside-right page 2group on this slide, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-right group you just created.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Ungroup.In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the straight connector (line) that you just ungrouped from the page.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the six straight connectors (lines). On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align Selected Objects.Click Distribute Horizontally.Click Align Middle. With the group of lines still selected, on the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then clickGroup.On the slide, drag the group until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the page.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.In the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the new group of lines and the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group.Also in the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right.Also in the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, and then selectthe Inside-right group, the text box, and the picture.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.In the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right page 2.To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-left page 3 group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left page 2 group.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. In the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the duplicate group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left.On the slide, drag the rectangle until the right edge is against the vertical drawing guide.On the Home, tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:ClickAlign to Slide.Click Align Middle. To reproduce the picture in the Inside-left page 3 group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture.In the InsertPicture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, resize or crop the picture as needed so that under Size and rotate, the Height box is set to 1.4” and the Width box is set to 2.1”. Resize the picture under Size and rotate by entering values into the Height and Width boxes. Crop the picture under Crop from by entering values into the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom boxes. On the slide, drag the picture until the left edge is 0.5” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the top edge is 0.25” below the horizontal drawing guide.To reproduce the text box in the Inside-left page 3 group, do the following: On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw the text box. Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select Bodoni MT Condensed.In the Font Size list, select 16.On the slide, drag the text box until the right edgeof the text is 0.5” to the left of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.25” above the horizontal drawing guide.If the text is too wide for the page, drag the adjustment handles on the text box to decrease the width, and then repeat the previous step to reposition. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-left page 3 group, do the following: In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left group you just created. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Ungroup.In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the straight connector (line) that you just ungrouped from the page.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, drag the duplicate line until it is very close to the original line. In the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the two straight connectors (lines). On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align Selected Objects.Click Align Middle. With the group of lines still selected, on the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then clickGroup.On the slide, drag the group until the leftedge of the group of lines is touching the left edge of the rectangle.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.In the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the new group of lines, the rectangle, the text box, and the picture. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group.Also in the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-left page 3.To reproduce the first shape in the Inside-right page1group on this slide, do the following:In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left page 2 group.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.In the Selection and Visibility pane, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right.In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-right group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Rotate, and then click More Rotation Options. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Size and rotation, in the Rotation box, enter 180°.On the slide, drag the group until the left edge is against the vertical drawing guide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle. To reproduce the text box in the Inside-right page1group on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click TextBox. Drag to draw a text box on the slide.Enter text in the text box (to match the example above, enter Introduction), and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select Vivaldi.In the Font Size list, select 18.On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box.On the slide, drag the text box until the left edge of the text is 0.75” to the right of the vertical drawing guide and the bottom edge of the text is 0.5” above the horizontal drawing guide.If the text is too wide for the page, drag the adjustment handles on the text box to decrease the width, and then repeat the previous step to reposition. To reproduce the page edges in the Inside-right page1group on this slide, do the following:In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-right group you just created.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Ungroup.In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the straight connector (line) that you just ungrouped from the page.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process for a total of six lines. On the slide, drag the six lines until they are bunched together in a dense group, no wider than 0.5”. In the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the six straight connectors (lines). On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align Selected Objects.Click Distribute Horizontally.Click Align Middle. With the group of lines still selected, on the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then clickGroup.On the slide, drag the group until the right edge of the group of lines is touching the right edge of the page.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.In the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, and then select the new group of lines, the rectangle, and the text box. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow under Arrange, and then click Group.Also in the Selection and Visibility pane, press and hold CTRL, double-click the new group to edit the name, and then enter Inside-right page 1.Right-click the slide background area, and then click Grid and Guides. In the Grid and Guides dialog box, under Guide settings, clear Display drawing guides on screen.On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, clear Ruler.In the Selection and Visibility pane, the final arrangement of the six groups of objects should be the following (from top to bottom):Inside-right page 1Inside-left page 3Inside-right page 2 Inside-left page 2Inside-right page 3Inside-left page 1To move a group of objects up in the Selectionand Visibility pane, do the following:In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the group of objects.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click BringForward.To move a group of objects down in the Selectionand Visibility pane, do the following:In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the group of objects.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then clickSend Backward.To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-right page 1 group. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Exit, and then click MoreEffects. In the AddExitEffect dialog box, under Moderate, click Collapse.Select the first animation effect (collapse effect for the Inside-right page 1 group). Under Modify: Collapse,do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious. In the Direction list, select To Left.In the Speed list, select Fast. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left page 2 group. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Moderate, click Stretch.Select the second animation effect (stretch effect for the Inside-left page 2 group). Under Modify: Stretch,do the following:In the Start list, select AfterPrevious.In the Direction list, select FromRight. In the Speed list, select Fast. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-right page 2 group. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Exit, and then click MoreEffects. In the AddExitEffect dialog box, under Moderate, click Collapse.Select the third animation effect (collapse effect for the Inside-right page 2 group). Under Modify: Collapse,do the following:In the Start list, select On Click.In the Direction list, select To Left.In the Speed list, select Fast. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Inside-left page 3 group. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Moderate, click Stretch.Select the fourth animation effect (stretch effect for the Inside-left page 3 group). Under Modify: Stretch,do the following:In the Start list, select AfterPrevious.In the Direction list, select FromRight. In the Speed list, select Fast. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 63%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickBlack, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, fifth option from the left).
  4. SmartArt custom animation effects: pictures peek-in(Basic)To reproduce the SmartArt effects on this page, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then clickBlank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click SmartArt.In the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, in the left pane, click Matrix. In the Matrix pane, double-click Titled Matrix (second option from the left) to insert the graphic into the slide. Select the graphic. Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Size, and then do the following:In the Height box, enter 5.67”.In the Width box, enter 8.5”.Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Arrange, click Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle. Click Align Center. Select the graphic, and then click one of the arrows on the left border. In the Type your text here dialog box, enter text in the top-level bullet only (text for the rounded rectangle at the center of the graphic). To remove the [Text] placeholder in the second-level bullets, select each bullet and press SPACE.On the slide, select the graphic. Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, click More, and then under Best Match for Document click Moderate Effect.Select the rounded rectangle at the center of the graphic. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select 28 from the Font Size list, click the arrow next to Font Color, and then click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).With the rounded rectangle selected, under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.In the Direction list, select LinearUp (second row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme ColorsclickWhite, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 80%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme ColorsclickWhite, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme ColorsclickWhite, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).Right-click the top left shape in the graphic, and then click Format Shape. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Picture or texture fill,and then under Insert from, click File.In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert. Right-click the top right shape in the graphic, and then click Format Shape. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Picture or texture fill,and then under Insert from, click File.In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert. Right-click the bottom left shape in the graphic, and then click Format Shape. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Picture or texture fill,and then under Insert from, click File.In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert. Right-click the bottom right shape in the graphic, and then click Format Shape. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Picture or texture fill,and then under Insert from, click File.In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.On the slide, select the graphic, and then do the following in the CustomAnimation task pane: Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Subtle, click Expand. Under Modify: Expand, in the Speed list, select Fast.Under Modify: Expand, in the Start list, select After Previous.Also in the Custom Animation task pane, click the arrow to the right of theanimation effect, and then click EffectOptions. In the Expand dialog box, on the SmartArt Animation tab, in the Group Graphic list, select One by one.Also in the Custom Animation taskpane, click the double-arrow below the animation effect to expand the list of effects, and then do the following:Press and hold CTRL, and then select all five animation effects in the Custom Animation task pane. Under Modify: Expand, in the Start list, select With Previous.Press and hold CTRL, select the second, third, fourth, and fifth animation effects (expand effects for the picture-filled rectangles), and then do the following:Click Change, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the Change Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Peek In. Under Modify: Peek In, in the Speed list, select Fast.Select the second animation effect. Under Modify: Peek In, in the Start list, select After Previous.Select the third animation effect. Under Modify: Peek In, in theDirection list, select From Left.Select the fourth animation effect. Under Modify: Peek In, in the Direction list, select From Right.Select the fifth animation effect. Under Modify: Peek In, in the Direction list, select From Top.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Corner (fifth option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme ColorsclickWhite, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 71%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme ColorsclickWhite, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
  5. SmartArt custom animation effects: continuous picture list(Basic)To reproduce the SmartArt effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then clickBlank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click SmartArt. In the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, in the left pane, click List. In the List pane, double-click Continuous Picture List (third row, fourth option from the left) to insert the graphic into the slide.On the slide, select the graphic. Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Size, and then do the following:In the Height box, enter 5.05”.In the Width box, enter 7.57”.Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Arrange, click Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle. Click Align Center. Select the graphic, and then click one of the arrows on the left border. In the Type your text here dialog box, enter text.Select the graphic. Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, click More, and then under Best Match for Document clickselect Moderate Effect (fourth option from the left).Click each of the three picture placeholders in the SmartArt graphic, and then in the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and click Insert.Press and hold CTRL, and then select the three circle pictures on the slide.Under PictureTools, on theFormat tab, in the PictureStyles group, click PictureEffects, point toGlow, and then do the following:Under Glow Variations, click Accent color 1, 8 pt glow(second row, first option from the left).Point to MoreGlowColors,and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Lighter 80% (second row, 10th option from the left).Select the left-right arrow at the bottom of the SmartArt graphic. Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the arrow next to ShapeFill, point to Gradient, and then click MoreGradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane,select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then select Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme ColorsclickOrange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fifth row, 10th option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then click MoreColors. In the Colors dialog box,on theCustom tab, enter values for Red: 255, Green: 192, Blue: 0.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme ColorsclickOrange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fifth row, 10th option from the left).Press and hold CTRL, and then select the three rounded rectangles on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT from the Font list, enter 30 pt in the Font Size box, click the arrow next to Font Color, and then click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click Shape Effects, point to Reflection, and then under ReflectionVariations click Tight reflection, touching (first row, first option from the left).Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.In the Direction list, select Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 19%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme ColorsclickBlack, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme ColorsclickBlack, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.On the slide, select the graphic. In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then clickMoreEffects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, underModerate, clickStretch. Under Modify: Stretch, in the Speed list, selectFast.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, click the arrow to the right of the animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Stretch dialog box, on the SmartArtAnimation tab, in the Group graphic list, select One by One.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, click the double arrows under the animation effect to expand the list of effects. Press and hold CTRL, and then select all of the animation effects in the Custom Animation task pane. Under Modify: Stretch, in the Start list, selectWith Previous.Select the first animation effect (stretch effect for the left-right arrow) in the CustomAnimation task pane. Under Modify: Stretch, click the arrow to the right of the effect, and then click Timing. In the Stretch dialog box, on the Timing tab, do the following: In the Delay box, enter 0.5.In the Speed box, enter 1.5 seconds.Press and hold CTRL, and then select the second and third animation effects (stretch effects for the left panel) in the CustomAnimation task pane. Under Modify: Stretch, in the Direction list, select From Right. Also in the Custom Animation task pane, with the second and third animation effects still selected, click the arrow to the right of one of those effects, and then click Timing. In the Stretch dialog box, on the Timing tab, in the Delay box, enter 1, and then click OK.Press and hold CTRL, and then select the sixth and seventh animation effects (stretch effects for the right panel) in the Custom Animation task pane. Under Modify: Stretch, in the Direction list, select From Left. Also in the Custom Animation task pane, with the sixth and seventh animation effects still selected, click the arrow to the right of one of those effects, and then click Timing. In the Stretch dialog box, on the Timing tab, in the Delay box, enter 1.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center(third option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1, Lighter 25% (fourth row, second option from the left).
  6. SmartArtcustom animation effects: vertical bullet list(Basic)To reproduce the SmartArt effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then clickBlank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click SmartArt. In the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, in the left pane, click List. In the List pane, click Vertical Bullet List (first row, third option from the left), and then click OK to insert the graphic into the slide.To create another row, select the bottom, first-level (color-filled) rectangle, and then under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the CreateGraphic group, click the arrow next to AddShape, and select AddShapeAfter.To add bullet text area, select the new first-level (color-filled) rectangle, and then under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the CreateGraphic group, click AddBullet.To enter text, select the graphic, and then click one of the arrows on the left border. In the Type your text here dialog box, enter text for each level. (Note: In the example slide, the first-level text is “Topic One,” “Topic Two,” and “Topic Three.” The second-level text is “Supporting Text.”)Select the border of the SmartArt graphic. Drag the left center sizing handle to the left edge of the slide to resize the width of the SmartArt graphic.To reproduce the rectangle effects on this slide, do the following:Press and hold CTRL, and select the three color-filled rectangles (in the example above, these are the “Topic One,” “Topic Two,” and “Topic Three” rectangles).Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shapes group, click ChangeShape, and under Rectangles select RoundDiagonalCornerRectangle (ninth option from the left).Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click ShapeEffects, point to Presets and select Preset 7 (second row, third option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Font group do the following:In the Font list, select FranklinGothicDemiCond.In the FontSize box, enter 32 pt.Click Shadow.On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click TextBox in the left pane, and in the TextBox pane, under Internalmargin, in the Left box enter 3”. Select the first color-filled rectangle from the top (in the example slide, “Topic One”).On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right(first row, fourth option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors select Olive Green, Accent 3 (first row, seventh option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 90%Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors select Olive Green, Accent 3 (first row, seventh option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 0%.Select the second color-filled rectangle from the top (in the example above, “Topic Two”).On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right(first row, fourth option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors select Blue, Accent 1 (first row, the fifth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 90%Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors select Blue, Accent 1 (first row, the fifth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 0%.Select the third color-filled rectangle from the top (in the example slide, “Topic Three”).On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right(first row, fourth option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors select Orange, Accent 6 (first row, 10th option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 90%Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors select Orange, Accent 6 (first row, 10th option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 0%.To reproduce the bulleted text on this slide, do the following:Press and hold CTRL, and select the three second-level, bulleted text boxes. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select FranklinGothicMediumCond.In the FontSize box, enter 22 pt.In the FontColor list, select White, Background 1, Darker 50% (sixth row, first option from the left).On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of theDrawing group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, select TextBox in the left pane, and in the TextBox pane do the following:Under Textlayout, in the Verticalalignment list select Middle.Under Internalmargin, do the following: In the Left box, enter 3.8”.In the Top box, enter 0.2”.In the Right box, enter 0.17”.In the Bottom box, enter 0.2”. Increase the height of the SmartArt graphic by dragging the top or bottom sizing handle. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.Select the SmartArt graphic on the slide, and then in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Entrance, and select MoreEffects. In the AddEntranceEffect dialog box, under Moderate,select Ascend.Click the arrow to the right of the ascend entrance effect, and then select EffectOptions. In the Ascend dialog box, do the following:On the Timing tab, in the Speed list, select 1 seconds (Fast).On the SmartArtAnimation tab, in the Groupgraphic list, select Onebyone. Click the double arrow below the animation effect to expand the list of effects.Press and hold CTRL, and select all the effects in the CustomAnimation task pane. Then under Modify: Ascend, in the Start list, select AfterPrevious.Press and hold CTRL, and select the second, fourth, and sixth effects (ascend entrance effects) in the CustomAnimation task pane. Click Change, point to Entrance, and then select MoreEffects. In the ChangeEntranceEffect dialog box, under Moderate, select EaseIn.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-clickthe slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Left (first row, fifth option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 60%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors select White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 90%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors select White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left). Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors select Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).
  7. Wire outline triangles(Basic)To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Basic Shapes click Right Triangle (first row, fourth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a triangle. Repeat the process to create multiple triangles. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, and then in the Fill pane, click No fill. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then do the following in the 3-D Format pane:Under Depth, in the Depth box, enter 500 pt. Under Contour, click the button next to Color, and then underTheme Colors click White, Background1 (first row, first option from the left). In the Size box, enter 3.5 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Special Effect click Wireframe (fourth option from the left). Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Rotation in the left pane. In the 3-D Rotation pane, click the button next to Presets, and then under Parallel click Isometric Top Up (first row, third option from the left). To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colorsclick Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60% (third row, fourth option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 80% (second row, fourth option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 91%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
  8. Transition effect: wedge(Basic)Tip: This transition can be used with SmartArt Cycle layouts, pie charts, or other circular graphics.To reproduce the SmartArt effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Blank.On the Insert tab, in theIllustrations group, click SmartArt.In the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, in the left pane, click Cycle.In the Cycle pane, click Radial Cycle (third row, first option from the left), and then click OK to insert the graphic into the slide.To create a fifth circle shape, select the small circle at the bottom of the graphic, and then under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the CreateGraphic group, click the arrow next to AddShape, and click AddShapeAfter.Select the graphic, and then click one of the arrows on the left border. In the Type your text here dialog box, enter text.On the slide, select the graphic. Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, click ChangeColors, and then underColorful click Colorful Range – Accent Colors 4 to 5 (fourth option from the left).Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, click More, and then under 3-D click Polished (first row, first option from the left).To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Transitionto This Slide group, click More. Under Wipes, click Wedge (fifth option from the left).To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.In the Direction list, click From Center (third option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 10%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
  9. Round bullet pattern(Basic)To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. On the Design tab, in the Background group, click BackgroundStyles, and then click Style 8 (second row, fourth option from the left).(Note: If this action is taken in a PowerPoint presentation containing more than one slide, the background style will be applied to all of the slides.) On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box that spans the entire width of the slide.On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Symbol. In the Symbol dialog box, do the following:In the Font list, select (normal text).In the Subset list, select General Punctuation.In the Character Code box, enter 2022 to select Bullet, and then click Insert.Click Insert 27 more times until there is a row of 28 bullets in the text box. Select the row of bullets. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Copy. In the text box, click to the right of the line of text and press ENTER to begin a new line of text. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the button above Paste. Repeat this process to create seven total rows of bullets within the text box. Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Calibrifrom the Font list, and then enter 50 in the Font Size box.On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click Text Effects, point to Transform, and then under Warp, click Curve Down (fourth row, second option from the left). On the slide, drag the text box to position the seven rows of bullets on the slide.On the text box, drag the pink diamond adjustment handle to adjust the amount of warp on the rows of bullets.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, point to Gradient Fill, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Text Effects dialog box, click Text Fill in the left pane. In the TextFill pane, select Gradient fill, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 180°.Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Background 1, Lighter 35% (third row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 70%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 75%.
  10. Floating, transparent 3-D rectangles(Basic)To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. Repeat the process to create multiple rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, and then select No fill in the Fill pane. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then in the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then do the following in the 3-D Format pane:Under Depth, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors, click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fifth option from the left). In the Depth box, enter 50 pt.Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Translucent, click Clear (third option from the left). Click the button next to Lighting, and then under Special, click Two Point (second option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 290°.Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Rotation in the left pane. In the 3-D Rotation pane, click the button next to Presets, under Perspective, click Perspective Heroic Extreme Left (third row, second option from the left), and then do the following:In the X box, enter 333°.In the Y box, enter 25.8°.In the Z box, enter 160°.In the Perspective box, enter 90°.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 58%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60% (third row, fourth option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 87%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 80% (second row, fourth option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).
  11. Square bullet pattern(Basic)To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw a text box that spans the entire width of the slide.On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Symbol. In the Symbol dialog box, do the following:In the Font list, select Arial.In the Character Code box, enter 25A0 and inthefrom box, select Unicode (hex)to select BLACK SQUARE,and then click Insert.Click Insert 29 more times until there is a row of 30 squares in the text box. Select the row of squares. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Copy. In the text box, click to the right of the line of text and press ENTER to begin a new line of text. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the button above Paste. Repeat this process to create 16 total rows of squares within the text box. Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Arialfrom the Font list and then select 28 from the Font Size list.On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box.On the Home tab, in the Font group, click Character Spacing, and then click Very Loose. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click Text Effects, point to Transform, and then under Warp click Inflate (sixth row, first option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Center.Click Align Middle. On the slide, drag the pink diamond adjustment handle to adjust the amount of warp on the rows of squares. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Text Effects dialog box, click Text Fill in the left pane. In the TextFill pane, select Gradient fill, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (thirdoption from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 5%(second row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Text 1, Darker 35%(fifth row, first option from the left).On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the FormatBackground dialog box launcher. In the FormatBackground dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (thirdoption from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15%(third row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Text 1, Darker 35%(fifth row, first option from the left).
  12. Text wrapped around a cylinder(Basic)To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Basic Shapes click Oval (first row, second option from the left). Press and hold SHIFT to constrain the shape to a circle, and then on the slide, drag to draw a circle.Select the circle. Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 3.21”.In the Shape Width box, enter 3.21”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Fill, clickMore Fill Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 170, Green: 180, Blue: 194.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, clickShape Outline, and then click No outline. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, clickShape Effects, and then do the following:Point to Bevel, and then under Bevel click Slope (second row, fourth option from the left). Point to 3-D Rotation, and then under Parallel click Off Axis 1 Top (second row, third option from the left). On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click 3-D Format in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:Under Bevel, click the button next to Bottom, and then under Bevel click Slope (second row, fourth option from the left). Under Depth, in the Depth box, enter 250 pt. Under Surface, click the button next to Material, and then under Special Effect click Dark Edge (first row, first option from the left). Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, clickShape Effects, point to Shadow, and then under Perspective click Perspective Diagonal Upper Right (first row, second option from the left). On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:In the Transparencybox, enter 51%. In the Sizebox, enter 121%. In the Blurbox, enter 28 pt. To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw the text box.Enter text in the text box, select the text, and then on the Home tab, in the Font group, select Franklin Gothic Medium Cond from the Font list, and then select 32 from the Font Size list.Select the text box. Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 1.43”.In the Shape Width box, enter 2.75”.Select the text. On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text in the text box.On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text on the slide.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click Text Effects, point to Transform, and then under Warp click Can Down (fourth row, fourth option from the left). Drag the pink diamond adjustment handle at the top of the text box to adjust the amount of text warp.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click the arrow next to Text Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients.In the Format Text Effects dialog box, click Text Fill in the left pane, select Gradient Fill in the right pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear. Click the button next to Direction, and then clickLinear Right (first row, fourth option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 0°.Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list. Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colorsclick White, Background 1, Darker 25% (fourth row, first option from the left). Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 50%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colorsclick White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 100%. Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colorsclick White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left).To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then clickFormat Background.In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then clickLinear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colorsclick Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter81%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colorsclick Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colorsclick Dark Blue, Text 2, Darker 25% (fifth row, fourth option from the left).
  13. Lace background(Basic)To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout and then click Blank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Clip Art. In the Clip Art pane, in the Search for box, enterj0437868. In the Search in list, select Everywhere. Select the clip art file to insert it into the slide. (Note: If you choose another clip art file, the clip art must be in the Windows Metafile format [.wmf].) On the slide, select the clip art.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Ungroup. In the Microsoft Office PowerPoint dialog box, click Yes. On the slide, select the converted clip art. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the top-level group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Ungroup. Also in the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Autoshape object, and then press DELETE. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Select All. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Regroup. On the slide, drag the adjustment handles on the group to increase its size so that it extends beyond the edges of the slide. Select the group. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box , click Fill in the left pane, select Solid fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 80%.Also in the Format Shape dialog box , click LineColor in the left pane, select Gradient line in the Line Color pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 90%.Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1(first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 100%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1(first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 0%.To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following: On the Design tab, in the bottom right corner of the Background group, click the Format Background dialog box launcher. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, first option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 225⁰.Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Tan, Background 2, Darker 10% (second row, third option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 18%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 209, Green: 211, Blue: 191.
  14. SmartArt custom animation effects: expand and peek in(Basic)To reproduce the SmartArt effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then clickBlank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click SmartArt. In the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, in the left pane, click Matrix. In the Matrix pane, click Titled Matrix (second option from the left), and then click OK to insert the graphic into the slide.Select the graphic, and then click one of the arrows on the left border. In the Type your text here dialog box, enter text.On the slide, select the graphic. Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, do the following: Click ChangeColors, and then under Colorful click Colorful - Accent Colors (first option from the left).Click More, and then under Best Match for Document click Moderate Effect (fourth option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Calibri from the Font list, and then select 24 from the Font Size list.On the slide, select the text in the center rounded rectangle of the graphic.On the Home tab, in the Font group, select 28 from the Font Size list, click the arrow next to Font Color,and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Right-click the rounded rectangle in the center of the graphic, and then click Format Shape.In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 80%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 35% (fifth row, first option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15%(third row, first option from the left).To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.On the slide, select the graphic. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following: Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Subtle, click Expand. Under Modify: Expand, in the Speed list, select Fast.Also in the Custom Animation task pane, select the expand effect. Click the arrow to the right of the expand effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Expand dialog box, on the SmartArt Animation tab, in the Group graphic list, select One by one.Also in the Custom Animation task pane, click the double arrow under the expand effect to expand the contents of the list of effects.Press and hold CTRL, and then select all five expand effects in the Custom Animation pane. Under Modify: Expand, in the Start list, select With Previous.Press and hold CTRL, select the second, third, fourth, and fifth expand effects in the Custom Animation pane, and then do the following:Under Modify: Expand, click Change, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Change Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Peek In, and then click OK.Under Modify: Peek In, in the Speed list, select Fast.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Select the second expand effect. Under Modify: Peek In, in the Start list, select After Previous.Select the third expand effect. Under Modify: Peek In, in theDirection list, select From Left.Select the fourth expand effect. Under Modify: Peek In, in the Direction list, select From Right.Select the fifth expand effect. Under Modify: Peek In, in the Direction list, select From Top.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Corner (second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 15% (third row, first option from the left).
  15. Diffused arches(Intermediate)To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Curve (tenth option from the left). On the slide, click three points to draw a simple curved line, double-clicking the final point to finish. Select the curved line. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then underTheme Colorsclick White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 50%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then underTheme Colorsclick White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shape Effects, point to Soft Edges, and then click 5 point. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the arrow next to Shape Outline, and then click No Outline. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 50% (sixth row, first option from the left).To reproduce the duplicate curved lines on the slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Repeat the process for a total of three curved lines. On the slide, drag the curved lines to position them as needed. Right-click one of the duplicate curved lines, click Edit Points, and then drag the points on the curve to make a new shape. Repeat the process with the other duplicate curved line.
  16. Faded picture background with full-color overlay(Intermediate)Tip: For best results with the picture overlay on this slide, use a picture that is the same dimensions as the slide: 7.5” high and 10” wide. If the picture is not the same height and width, resize or crop to those dimensions before following the instructions below. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide and then click FormatBackground.In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane. In the Fill pane, select Picture or texture fill, and then under Insert from, click File. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.Also in the Format Background dialog box, in the Fill pane, in the Transparency box, enter 50%.Also in the Format Background dialog box, click Picture in the left pane. In the Picture pane, click the button next to Recolor, and then under Light Variations, click Background color 2 Light (first option from the left). On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture.In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the same picture chosen for the background, and then click Insert. Select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Crop from,enter 8.27” into the Right box to crop the picture to a width of 2.25”. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shape Effects, point to Soft Edges, and then click 10 point.
  17. Faded picture background with full-color overlay(Intermediate)Tip: For best results with the picture overlay on this slide, use a picture that is the same dimensions as the slide: 7.5” high and 10” wide. If the picture is not the same height and width, resize or crop to those dimensions before following the instructions below. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide and then click FormatBackground.In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane. In the Fill pane, select Picture or texture fill, and then under Insert from, click File. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.Also in the Format Background dialog box, in the Fill pane, in the Transparency box, enter 50%.Also in the Format Background dialog box, click Picture in the left pane. In the Picture pane, click the button next to Recolor, and then under Light Variations, click Background color 2 Light (first option from the left). On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture.In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the same picture chosen for the background, and then click Insert. Select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Crop from,enter 8.27” into the Right box to crop the picture to a width of 2.25”. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shape Effects, point to Soft Edges, and then click 10 point.
  18. Faded picture background with full-color overlay(Intermediate)Tip: For best results with the picture overlay on this slide, use a picture that is the same dimensions as the slide: 7.5” high and 10” wide. If the picture is not the same height and width, resize or crop to those dimensions before following the instructions below. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. Right-click the slide and then click FormatBackground.In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane. In the Fill pane, select Picture or texture fill, and then under Insert from, click File. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.Also in the Format Background dialog box, in the Fill pane, in the Transparency box, enter 50%.Also in the Format Background dialog box, click Picture in the left pane. In the Picture pane, click the button next to Recolor, and then under Light Variations, click Background color 2 Light (first option from the left). On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture.In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the same picture chosen for the background, and then click Insert. Select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Crop from,enter 8.27” into the Right box to crop the picture to a width of 2.25”. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shape Effects, point to Soft Edges, and then click 10 point.
  19. Half-circle picture with accent arcs(Basic)To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Basic Shapes, click Arc (third row, 12th option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw an arc.Select the arc. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 7.5”.In the Shape Width box, enter 7.5”.Drag the yellow diamond adjustment handle on the right side of the arc to the bottom of the slide to create a half-circle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Shape Styles group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane. In the Fill pane, select Pictureor texture fill, and then do the following under Insert from: Click File. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert. Select Tile picture as texture. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select No line. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Right (first row, third option from the left), and then do the following:In the Transparency box, enter 70%.In the Blur box, enter 20 pt.In the Distance box, enter 20 pt. Drag the half-circle to the left until the two middle yellow adjustment diamonds are lined up with the left edge of the slide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle. Select the arc. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Select the second arc. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 6.79”.In the Shape Width box, enter 10.03”.On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, click Fill in the left pane. In the Fill pane, select No fill. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane. In the Line Color pane, select Solid line and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 50%.Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 1.5 pt.Drag the second arc left on the slide until the two middle yellow adjustment diamonds are lined up with the left edge of the slide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle.Select the second arc. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Select the third arc. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 6.86”.In the ShapeWidth box, enter 9.98”.On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Gradient line in the Line Color pane, and then do the following: In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Blue, Accent 1, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fifth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 77%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 208, Green: 215, Blue: 222.In the Format Shape dialog box, in the Line Style pane, in the Transparency box, enter 90%.Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane. In the Line Style pane, in the Width box, enter 4.25 pt. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Left. Drag the third arc left on the slide until the two middle yellow adjustment diamonds are lined up with the left edge of the slide. Drag the third arc vertically as needed to position it slightly above the second arc on the slide. To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left). In the Angle box, enter 270⁰.Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until four stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 167, Green: 185, Blue: 197.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 30%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 70%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 4 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 167, Green: 185, Blue: 197.
  20. Transparent light effect(Basic)To reproduce one of the shapes on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout and then click Blank. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Basic Shapes click Oval (first row, second option from the left). Press and hold SHIFT to constrain the shape to a circle, and then drag to draw a circle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then select No line in the Line Color pane. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (thirdoption from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 80%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 70%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shape Effects, point to Soft Edges, and then click 10 Point. To reproduce the other shapeson this slide, do the following:Select the circle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process to create a total of 10 circles. On the slide, drag the circles to position them at random intervals. For each circle, press and hold SHIFT and then drag the adjustment handles to resize as needed.To reproduce the different color and transparency effects in each of the shapes, do the following:Select the shape. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher.In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, and then select Gradient fill in the Fill pane. Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list, and then do the following:For the first and third (small circle below larger circle) circles from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 90%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 85%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the second circle from the left, do not change the Gradient stops settings in the Format Shape dialog box. For the fourth circle from the left (large circle above third circle):Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 80%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 70%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60% (third row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the fifth circle from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 88%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 71%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the sixth circle from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 227, Green: 209, Blue: 143.In the Transparency box, enter 84%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 223, Green: 205, Blue: 75.In the Transparency box, enter 85%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 214, Green: 195, Blue: 84.In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the seventh circle from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 60%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 60%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the eighth circle from the left, do not change the Gradient stops settings in the Format Shape dialog box. For the ninth circle from the left (small brown circle below larger blue circle):Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 227, Green: 209, Blue: 143.In the Transparency box, enter 70%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 223, Green: 205, Blue: 75.In the Transparency box, enter 85%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 214, Green: 195, Blue: 84.In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the tenth circle from the left (large blue circle above ninth circle):Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 80%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 74%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 65, Green: 68, Blue: 97.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 99%.Click the button next to Color, and then click Black, Text 1(first row, second option from the left).
  21. Transparent light effect(Basic)To reproduce one of the shapes on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout and then click Blank. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Basic Shapes click Oval (first row, second option from the left). Press and hold SHIFT to constrain the shape to a circle, and then drag to draw a circle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then select No line in the Line Color pane. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (thirdoption from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 80%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 70%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shape Effects, point to Soft Edges, and then click 10 Point. To reproduce the other shapeson this slide, do the following:Select the circle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process to create a total of 10 circles. On the slide, drag the circles to position them at random intervals. For each circle, press and hold SHIFT and then drag the adjustment handles to resize as needed.To reproduce the different color and transparency effects in each of the shapes, do the following:Select the shape. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher.In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, and then select Gradient fill in the Fill pane. Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list, and then do the following:For the first and third (small circle below larger circle) circles from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 90%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 85%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the second circle from the left, do not change the Gradient stops settings in the Format Shape dialog box. For the fourth circle from the left (large circle above third circle):Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 80%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 70%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60% (third row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the fifth circle from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 88%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 71%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the sixth circle from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 227, Green: 209, Blue: 143.In the Transparency box, enter 84%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 223, Green: 205, Blue: 75.In the Transparency box, enter 85%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 214, Green: 195, Blue: 84.In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the seventh circle from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 60%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 60%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the eighth circle from the left, do not change the Gradient stops settings in the Format Shape dialog box. For the ninth circle from the left (small brown circle below larger blue circle):Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 227, Green: 209, Blue: 143.In the Transparency box, enter 70%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 223, Green: 205, Blue: 75.In the Transparency box, enter 85%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 214, Green: 195, Blue: 84.In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the tenth circle from the left (large blue circle above ninth circle):Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 80%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 74%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 65, Green: 68, Blue: 97.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 99%.Click the button next to Color, and then click Black, Text 1(first row, second option from the left).
  22. Transparent light effect(Basic)To reproduce one of the shapes on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout and then click Blank. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Basic Shapes click Oval (first row, second option from the left). Press and hold SHIFT to constrain the shape to a circle, and then drag to draw a circle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then select No line in the Line Color pane. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (thirdoption from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 80%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 70%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shape Effects, point to Soft Edges, and then click 10 Point. To reproduce the other shapeson this slide, do the following:Select the circle on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Repeat this process to create a total of 10 circles. On the slide, drag the circles to position them at random intervals. For each circle, press and hold SHIFT and then drag the adjustment handles to resize as needed.To reproduce the different color and transparency effects in each of the shapes, do the following:Select the shape. On the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher.In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, and then select Gradient fill in the Fill pane. Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list, and then do the following:For the first and third (small circle below larger circle) circles from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 90%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 85%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the second circle from the left, do not change the Gradient stops settings in the Format Shape dialog box. For the fourth circle from the left (large circle above third circle):Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 80%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 70%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60% (third row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the fifth circle from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 88%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 71%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the sixth circle from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 227, Green: 209, Blue: 143.In the Transparency box, enter 84%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 223, Green: 205, Blue: 75.In the Transparency box, enter 85%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 214, Green: 195, Blue: 84.In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the seventh circle from the left:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 60%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 60%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the eighth circle from the left, do not change the Gradient stops settings in the Format Shape dialog box. For the ninth circle from the left (small brown circle below larger blue circle):Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 227, Green: 209, Blue: 143.In the Transparency box, enter 70%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 223, Green: 205, Blue: 75.In the Transparency box, enter 85%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 214, Green: 195, Blue: 84.In the Transparency box, enter 100%.For the tenth circle from the left (large blue circle above ninth circle):Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 60%(third row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 80%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 50%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40%(fourth row, fourth option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 74%.Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Dark Blue, Text 2, Lighter 40% (fourth row, fourth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 100%.To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 65, Green: 68, Blue: 97.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 99%.Click the button next to Color, and then click Black, Text 1(first row, second option from the left).
  23. Custom animation effects: motion paths with auto-reverse, varying speeds(Advanced)To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, select Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw the first rectangle.Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 10.5”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and click MoreColors.In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 86, Green: 113, Blue: 118.In the Transparency box, enter 40%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Line Color, and then inthe Line Color pane, click No line.Select the rectangle.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow underPaste, and then click Duplicate. Select the duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 4.96”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher.In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, select Solid fill. Click the button next to Color,and then under Theme Colorsselect Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 40%.Press and hold SHIFT and select both rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange,point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Center.Click Align Middle.To reproduce the animation effects for the second rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the second rectangle (smaller, red).On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. (Note: For this animation effect, the first (largest, blue) rectangle remains stationary on the slide.)In the Custom Animation task pane, click Add Effect, point to Motion Paths, and then click Right. On the slide, select motion path endpoint (red arrow), and drag the end of the path beyond the right edge of the slide. Select the motion path starting point (green arrow), and drag the starting point of the path beyond the left edge of the slide. In the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the motion path animation effect,and then under Modify: Right,in the Start list,select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the motion path animation effect, and click Effect Options. In the Right dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Speed box, enter 3.55 seconds, and thenin the Repeat list, select Until End of Slide.To reproduce the animation effects for the third rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the second (small, red) rectangle.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, click Duplicate, and then drag the new rectangle (along with the new motion path) above the other rectangles. Repeat this step three more times until there is a total of six rectangles (including the original two).Select the third rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 3.16”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then click MoreColors.In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 79, Green: 129, Blue: 189.In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, click the third rectangle motion path animation effect, and then under Modify: Right, in the Start list,select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the third rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list,select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 3.1 seconds.On the slide, position the third rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges.To reproduce the animation effects for the fourth rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the fourth rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 1.68”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Darker 50% (sixth row, seventh option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, select the fourthrectangle motion path animation effect, and under Modify: Right, in the Start box, select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the fourth rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list,select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 3.95 seconds.On the slide, position the fourth rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges.To reproduce the animation effects for the fifth rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the fifthrectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 1.5”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then click MoreColors.In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green:140, Blue: 60.In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, select the fifthrectangle motion path animation effect, and then under Modify: Right, in the Start list,select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the fifth rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list, select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 5.3 seconds.On the slide, position the fifth rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges. To reproduce the animation effects for the sixth rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the sixth rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 0.98”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Darker 25% (fifth row, seventh option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, select the sixth rectangle motion path animation effect, and under Modify: Right, in the Start box, select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the sixth rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list, select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 4.2 seconds.On the slide, position the sixth rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 40%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
  24. Custom animation effects: motion paths with auto-reverse, varying speeds(Advanced)To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, select Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw the first rectangle.Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 10.5”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and click MoreColors.In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 86, Green: 113, Blue: 118.In the Transparency box, enter 40%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Line Color, and then inthe Line Color pane, click No line.Select the rectangle.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow underPaste, and then click Duplicate. Select the duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 4.96”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher.In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, select Solid fill. Click the button next to Color,and then under Theme Colorsselect Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 40%.Press and hold SHIFT and select both rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange,point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Center.Click Align Middle.To reproduce the animation effects for the second rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the second rectangle (smaller, red).On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. (Note: For this animation effect, the first (largest, blue) rectangle remains stationary on the slide.)In the Custom Animation task pane, click Add Effect, point to Motion Paths, and then click Right. On the slide, select motion path endpoint (red arrow), and drag the end of the path beyond the right edge of the slide. Select the motion path starting point (green arrow), and drag the starting point of the path beyond the left edge of the slide. In the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the motion path animation effect,and then under Modify: Right,in the Start list,select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the motion path animation effect, and click Effect Options. In the Right dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Speed box, enter 3.55 seconds, and thenin the Repeat list, select Until End of Slide.To reproduce the animation effects for the third rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the second (small, red) rectangle.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, click Duplicate, and then drag the new rectangle (along with the new motion path) above the other rectangles. Repeat this step three more times until there is a total of six rectangles (including the original two).Select the third rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 3.16”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then click MoreColors.In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 79, Green: 129, Blue: 189.In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, click the third rectangle motion path animation effect, and then under Modify: Right, in the Start list,select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the third rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list,select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 3.1 seconds.On the slide, position the third rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges.To reproduce the animation effects for the fourth rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the fourth rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 1.68”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Darker 50% (sixth row, seventh option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, select the fourthrectangle motion path animation effect, and under Modify: Right, in the Start box, select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the fourth rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list,select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 3.95 seconds.On the slide, position the fourth rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges.To reproduce the animation effects for the fifth rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the fifthrectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 1.5”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then click MoreColors.In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green:140, Blue: 60.In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, select the fifthrectangle motion path animation effect, and then under Modify: Right, in the Start list,select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the fifth rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list, select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 5.3 seconds.On the slide, position the fifth rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges. To reproduce the animation effects for the sixth rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the sixth rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 0.98”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Darker 25% (fifth row, seventh option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, select the sixth rectangle motion path animation effect, and under Modify: Right, in the Start box, select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the sixth rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list, select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 4.2 seconds.On the slide, position the sixth rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 40%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
  25. Custom animation effects: motion paths with auto-reverse, varying speeds(Advanced)To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, select Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw the first rectangle.Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 10.5”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and click MoreColors.In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 86, Green: 113, Blue: 118.In the Transparency box, enter 40%. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Line Color, and then inthe Line Color pane, click No line.Select the rectangle.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow underPaste, and then click Duplicate. Select the duplicate rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 4.96”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher.In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, select Solid fill. Click the button next to Color,and then under Theme Colorsselect Red, Accent 2, Darker 50% (sixth row, sixth option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 40%.Press and hold SHIFT and select both rectangles. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange,point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Center.Click Align Middle.To reproduce the animation effects for the second rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the second rectangle (smaller, red).On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. (Note: For this animation effect, the first (largest, blue) rectangle remains stationary on the slide.)In the Custom Animation task pane, click Add Effect, point to Motion Paths, and then click Right. On the slide, select motion path endpoint (red arrow), and drag the end of the path beyond the right edge of the slide. Select the motion path starting point (green arrow), and drag the starting point of the path beyond the left edge of the slide. In the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the motion path animation effect,and then under Modify: Right,in the Start list,select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the motion path animation effect, and click Effect Options. In the Right dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Speed box, enter 3.55 seconds, and thenin the Repeat list, select Until End of Slide.To reproduce the animation effects for the third rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the second (small, red) rectangle.On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, click Duplicate, and then drag the new rectangle (along with the new motion path) above the other rectangles. Repeat this step three more times until there is a total of six rectangles (including the original two).Select the third rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 3.16”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then click MoreColors.In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 79, Green: 129, Blue: 189.In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, click the third rectangle motion path animation effect, and then under Modify: Right, in the Start list,select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the third rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list,select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 3.1 seconds.On the slide, position the third rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges.To reproduce the animation effects for the fourth rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the fourth rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 1.68”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Darker 50% (sixth row, seventh option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, select the fourthrectangle motion path animation effect, and under Modify: Right, in the Start box, select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the fourth rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list,select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 3.95 seconds.On the slide, position the fourth rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges.To reproduce the animation effects for the fifth rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the fifthrectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 1.5”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then click MoreColors.In the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 127, Green:140, Blue: 60.In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, select the fifthrectangle motion path animation effect, and then under Modify: Right, in the Start list,select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the fifth rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list, select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 5.3 seconds.On the slide, position the fifth rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges. To reproduce the animation effects for the sixth rectangle on this slide, do the following:Select the sixth rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 0.86”.In the Shape Width box, enter 0.98”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box in the left pane, click Fill. In the Fill pane, click Solid fill,and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Darker 25% (fifth row, seventh option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 40%. On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. In the CustomAnimation task pane, select the sixth rectangle motion path animation effect, and under Modify: Right, in the Start box, select With Previous. Also in the CustomAnimationtask pane, click the arrow next to the sixth rectangle motion path animation effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Effect Options dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, select Auto-Reverse.On the Timing tab, in the Repeat list, select Until End of Slide, and in the Speed box, enter 4.2 seconds.On the slide, position the sixth rectangle on the first (and longest) rectangle, lining up the top and bottom edges. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 40%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).
  26. SmartArt custom animation effects: vertical chevron list with bright colors(Basic)To reproduce the SmartArt effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then clickBlank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click SmartArt. In the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, in the left pane, click List. In the List pane, click Vertical Chevron List (fourth row, fourth option from the left), and then click OK to insert the graphic into the slide.Select the graphic, and then click one of the arrows on the left border. In the Type your text here dialog box, enter text. Select the graphic. Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Size, and then do the following:In the Height box, enter 5.35”.In the Width box, enter 6.86”.Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Arrange, click Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle. Click Align Center. On the slide, select the graphic. On the Design tab, in the Themes group, click Colors,and then under Built-in click Solstice. (Note: If this action is taken in a PowerPoint presentation containing more than one slide, the color scheme will be applied to all of the slides.)Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, do the following:Click ChangeColors and then under Colorful click Colorful Range – Accent Colors 4 to 5 (fourth option from the left).Click More, and then under 3-D click Polished (first row, first option from the left).Press and hold CTRL, and then select the three chevron shapes (topic headings). On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT Condensed from the Font list, and then enter 35 in the Font Size box.Press and hold CTRL, and then select the three rectangles (bulleted lists). On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT Condensed from the Font list, and then enter 33 in the Font Size box. Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 20%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 73%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 0%.To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.On the slide, select the graphic. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Moderate, click Descend.Under Modify: Descend, in the Speed list, select VeryFast.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, select the animation effect. Click the arrow to the right of the animation effect, and then click EffectOptions. In the Descend dialog box, on the SmartArtAnimation tab, in the Group graphic list, select One by one, and then click OK.Also in the Custom Animation taskpane, click the double arrow under the animation effect to expand the contents of the list of effects, and then do the following:Select the first animation effect (descend effect for the first topic heading). Under Modify: Descend, in the Start list, select After Previous. Press and hold CTRL, select the second, fourth, and sixthanimation effects (descend effects for the bulleted lists), and then do the following:Click Change, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Change Entrance Effect dialog box, under Moderate, click Stretch, and then click OK.Under Modify: Stretch, in the Direction list, select From Left. Under Modify: Stretch, in the Speed list, select Fast.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 20%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 0%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickWhite, Background 1, Darker 50% (sixth row, first option from the left).
  27. SmartArt custom animation effects: vertical chevron list with bright colors(Basic)To reproduce the SmartArt effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then clickBlank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click SmartArt. In the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, in the left pane, click List. In the List pane, click Vertical Chevron List (fourth row, fourth option from the left), and then click OK to insert the graphic into the slide.Select the graphic, and then click one of the arrows on the left border. In the Type your text here dialog box, enter text. Select the graphic. Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Size, and then do the following:In the Height box, enter 5.35”.In the Width box, enter 6.86”.Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Arrange, click Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle. Click Align Center. On the slide, select the graphic. On the Design tab, in the Themes group, click Colors,and then under Built-in click Solstice. (Note: If this action is taken in a PowerPoint presentation containing more than one slide, the color scheme will be applied to all of the slides.)Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, do the following:Click ChangeColors and then under Colorful click Colorful Range – Accent Colors 4 to 5 (fourth option from the left).Click More, and then under 3-D click Polished (first row, first option from the left).Press and hold CTRL, and then select the three chevron shapes (topic headings). On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT Condensed from the Font list, and then enter 35 in the Font Size box.Press and hold CTRL, and then select the three rectangles (bulleted lists). On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT Condensed from the Font list, and then enter 33 in the Font Size box. Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 20%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 73%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 0%.To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.On the slide, select the graphic. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Moderate, click Descend.Under Modify: Descend, in the Speed list, select VeryFast.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, select the animation effect. Click the arrow to the right of the animation effect, and then click EffectOptions. In the Descend dialog box, on the SmartArtAnimation tab, in the Group graphic list, select One by one, and then click OK.Also in the Custom Animation taskpane, click the double arrow under the animation effect to expand the contents of the list of effects, and then do the following:Select the first animation effect (descend effect for the first topic heading). Under Modify: Descend, in the Start list, select After Previous. Press and hold CTRL, select the second, fourth, and sixthanimation effects (descend effects for the bulleted lists), and then do the following:Click Change, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Change Entrance Effect dialog box, under Moderate, click Stretch, and then click OK.Under Modify: Stretch, in the Direction list, select From Left. Under Modify: Stretch, in the Speed list, select Fast.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 20%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 0%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickWhite, Background 1, Darker 50% (sixth row, first option from the left).
  28. SmartArt custom animation effects: vertical chevron list with bright colors(Basic)To reproduce the SmartArt effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then clickBlank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click SmartArt. In the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, in the left pane, click List. In the List pane, click Vertical Chevron List (fourth row, fourth option from the left), and then click OK to insert the graphic into the slide.Select the graphic, and then click one of the arrows on the left border. In the Type your text here dialog box, enter text. Select the graphic. Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Size, and then do the following:In the Height box, enter 5.35”.In the Width box, enter 6.86”.Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Arrange, click Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle. Click Align Center. On the slide, select the graphic. On the Design tab, in the Themes group, click Colors,and then under Built-in click Solstice. (Note: If this action is taken in a PowerPoint presentation containing more than one slide, the color scheme will be applied to all of the slides.)Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, do the following:Click ChangeColors and then under Colorful click Colorful Range – Accent Colors 4 to 5 (fourth option from the left).Click More, and then under 3-D click Polished (first row, first option from the left).Press and hold CTRL, and then select the three chevron shapes (topic headings). On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT Condensed from the Font list, and then enter 35 in the Font Size box.Press and hold CTRL, and then select the three rectangles (bulleted lists). On the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT Condensed from the Font list, and then enter 33 in the Font Size box. Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 20%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 73%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 0%.To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.On the slide, select the graphic. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Moderate, click Descend.Under Modify: Descend, in the Speed list, select VeryFast.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, select the animation effect. Click the arrow to the right of the animation effect, and then click EffectOptions. In the Descend dialog box, on the SmartArtAnimation tab, in the Group graphic list, select One by one, and then click OK.Also in the Custom Animation taskpane, click the double arrow under the animation effect to expand the contents of the list of effects, and then do the following:Select the first animation effect (descend effect for the first topic heading). Under Modify: Descend, in the Start list, select After Previous. Press and hold CTRL, select the second, fourth, and sixthanimation effects (descend effects for the bulleted lists), and then do the following:Click Change, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Change Entrance Effect dialog box, under Moderate, click Stretch, and then click OK.Under Modify: Stretch, in the Direction list, select From Left. Under Modify: Stretch, in the Speed list, select Fast.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.In the Direction list, click Linear Up (second row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 20%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 0%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickWhite, Background 1, Darker 50% (sixth row, first option from the left).
  29. Custom animation effects: spinning clip art with text(Intermediate)To reproduce the clip art on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Clip Art.In the Clip Art pane, in the Search for box, enter j0435540. In the Search in list, select Everywhere, and then click Go. Select the clip art file in the pane to insert it into the slide. (Note: If you choose another clip art file, the clip art must be in the Windows Metafile format [.wmf].)On the slide, select the clip art. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 5.83”.In the Shape Width box, enter 8.12”.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Ungroup.In the Microsoft Office PowerPoint dialog box, click Yes. On the slide, select the converted clip art. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the top-level group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Ungroup. Also in the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Autoshape object, and then press DELETE. Press CTRL+A to select all of the objects on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.Select the group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shape Effects, point to Preset, and then under Presets click Preset 8 (second row, fourth option from the left). With the group still selected, under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher, and do the following:On the Size tab, in the Height box, enter 6.27”.On the Size tab, in the Width box, enter 6.27”.On the Position tab, in the Horizontal box, enter 3.89”. On the Position tab, in the Vertical box, enter 1.55”To reproduce the text on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click TextBox.Drag to draw a text box on the slide.In the text box, enter text and select it. On the Home tab, in the Font group do the following:In the Font list, select Candara.In the FontSize box, enter 32 pt.In the FontColor list, under StandardColors select Orange (third option from the left). Click Italic. Select the text box on the slide, and then under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the ShapeHeight box, enter 7.29”.In the ShapeWidth box, enter 7.29”.Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the WordArtStyles group, click TextEffects, point to Transform, and under FollowPath select ArchUp (first option from the left).To wrap the text upside down, at the bottom of the text box, drag the pink adjustment diamond from the center left position in the text box to the lower right corner of the text box. With the text box still selected, under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher, and then on the Position tab do the following:In the Horizontal box, enter 3.38”. In the Vertical box, enter 1.04”.To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animation tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.Select the circle clip art on the slide, and then in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Emphasis effect and select MoreEffects. In the AddEmphasisEffect dialog box, under Basic select Spin, and then click OK.Click the arrow to the right of the spin emphasis effect, select Effect Options,and do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, select QuarterSpin.On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, select Counterclockwise.On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select WithPrevious.On the Timing tab, in the Speed box enter4.0 seconds.Click OK.On the slide, select the text box, and then in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click the AddEffect, point to Entrance and select MoreEffects. In the AddEntranceEffect dialog box, under Subtle select Fade, and then click OK.Select the fade entrance effect (second effect), and under Modify: Fade do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Speed list, select Slow. With the text box still selected, click AddEffect, point to Emphasis and select MoreEffects. In the AddEmphasisEffect dialog box, under Basic select Spin, and then click OK.Select the spin emphasis effect (third effect), and under Modify: Spin do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Amount list, select HalfSpin.In the Speed list select Slow. With the text box still selected, click AddEffect, point to Emphasis and select MoreEffects. In the AddEmphasisEffect dialog box, under Basic select Spin, and then click OK.Click the arrow to the right of the spin emphasis effect (fourth effect), select Effect Options,and do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, in the Custom box enter 30°, and then press ENTER.On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, select Counterclockwise.On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select WithPrevious.On the Timing tab, in the Delay box enter 3.0 seconds.On the Timing tab, in the Speed box enter1 seconds (Fast).Click OK.To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.In the Direction, list click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left)Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickBlack, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).
  30. Custom animation effects: spinning clip art with text(Intermediate)To reproduce the clip art on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Clip Art.In the Clip Art pane, in the Search for box, enter j0435540. In the Search in list, select Everywhere, and then click Go. Select the clip art file in the pane to insert it into the slide. (Note: If you choose another clip art file, the clip art must be in the Windows Metafile format [.wmf].)On the slide, select the clip art. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 5.83”.In the Shape Width box, enter 8.12”.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Ungroup.In the Microsoft Office PowerPoint dialog box, click Yes. On the slide, select the converted clip art. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the top-level group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Ungroup. Also in the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Autoshape object, and then press DELETE. Press CTRL+A to select all of the objects on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.Select the group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shape Effects, point to Preset, and then under Presets click Preset 8 (second row, fourth option from the left). With the group still selected, under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher, and do the following:On the Size tab, in the Height box, enter 6.27”.On the Size tab, in the Width box, enter 6.27”.On the Position tab, in the Horizontal box, enter 3.89”. On the Position tab, in the Vertical box, enter 1.55”To reproduce the text on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click TextBox.Drag to draw a text box on the slide.In the text box, enter text and select it. On the Home tab, in the Font group do the following:In the Font list, select Candara.In the FontSize box, enter 32 pt.In the FontColor list, under StandardColors select Orange (third option from the left). Click Italic. Select the text box on the slide, and then under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the ShapeHeight box, enter 7.29”.In the ShapeWidth box, enter 7.29”.Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the WordArtStyles group, click TextEffects, point to Transform, and under FollowPath select ArchUp (first option from the left).To wrap the text upside down, at the bottom of the text box, drag the pink adjustment diamond from the center left position in the text box to the lower right corner of the text box. With the text box still selected, under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher, and then on the Position tab do the following:In the Horizontal box, enter 3.38”. In the Vertical box, enter 1.04”.To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animation tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.Select the circle clip art on the slide, and then in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Emphasis effect and select MoreEffects. In the AddEmphasisEffect dialog box, under Basic select Spin, and then click OK.Click the arrow to the right of the spin emphasis effect, select Effect Options,and do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, select QuarterSpin.On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, select Counterclockwise.On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select WithPrevious.On the Timing tab, in the Speed box enter4.0 seconds.Click OK.On the slide, select the text box, and then in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click the AddEffect, point to Entrance and select MoreEffects. In the AddEntranceEffect dialog box, under Subtle select Fade, and then click OK.Select the fade entrance effect (second effect), and under Modify: Fade do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Speed list, select Slow. With the text box still selected, click AddEffect, point to Emphasis and select MoreEffects. In the AddEmphasisEffect dialog box, under Basic select Spin, and then click OK.Select the spin emphasis effect (third effect), and under Modify: Spin do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Amount list, select HalfSpin.In the Speed list select Slow. With the text box still selected, click AddEffect, point to Emphasis and select MoreEffects. In the AddEmphasisEffect dialog box, under Basic select Spin, and then click OK.Click the arrow to the right of the spin emphasis effect (fourth effect), select Effect Options,and do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, in the Custom box enter 30°, and then press ENTER.On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, select Counterclockwise.On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select WithPrevious.On the Timing tab, in the Delay box enter 3.0 seconds.On the Timing tab, in the Speed box enter1 seconds (Fast).Click OK.To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.In the Direction, list click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left)Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickBlack, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).
  31. Custom animation effects: spinning clip art with text(Intermediate)To reproduce the clip art on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Clip Art.In the Clip Art pane, in the Search for box, enter j0435540. In the Search in list, select Everywhere, and then click Go. Select the clip art file in the pane to insert it into the slide. (Note: If you choose another clip art file, the clip art must be in the Windows Metafile format [.wmf].)On the slide, select the clip art. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 5.83”.In the Shape Width box, enter 8.12”.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Ungroup.In the Microsoft Office PowerPoint dialog box, click Yes. On the slide, select the converted clip art. On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the top-level group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Ungroup. Also in the Selection and Visibility pane, select the Autoshape object, and then press DELETE. Press CTRL+A to select all of the objects on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.Select the group. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shape Effects, point to Preset, and then under Presets click Preset 8 (second row, fourth option from the left). With the group still selected, under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher, and do the following:On the Size tab, in the Height box, enter 6.27”.On the Size tab, in the Width box, enter 6.27”.On the Position tab, in the Horizontal box, enter 3.89”. On the Position tab, in the Vertical box, enter 1.55”To reproduce the text on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click TextBox.Drag to draw a text box on the slide.In the text box, enter text and select it. On the Home tab, in the Font group do the following:In the Font list, select Candara.In the FontSize box, enter 32 pt.In the FontColor list, under StandardColors select Orange (third option from the left). Click Italic. Select the text box on the slide, and then under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the ShapeHeight box, enter 7.29”.In the ShapeWidth box, enter 7.29”.Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the WordArtStyles group, click TextEffects, point to Transform, and under FollowPath select ArchUp (first option from the left).To wrap the text upside down, at the bottom of the text box, drag the pink adjustment diamond from the center left position in the text box to the lower right corner of the text box. With the text box still selected, under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher, and then on the Position tab do the following:In the Horizontal box, enter 3.38”. In the Vertical box, enter 1.04”.To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animation tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.Select the circle clip art on the slide, and then in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Emphasis effect and select MoreEffects. In the AddEmphasisEffect dialog box, under Basic select Spin, and then click OK.Click the arrow to the right of the spin emphasis effect, select Effect Options,and do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, select QuarterSpin.On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, select Counterclockwise.On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select WithPrevious.On the Timing tab, in the Speed box enter4.0 seconds.Click OK.On the slide, select the text box, and then in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click the AddEffect, point to Entrance and select MoreEffects. In the AddEntranceEffect dialog box, under Subtle select Fade, and then click OK.Select the fade entrance effect (second effect), and under Modify: Fade do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Speed list, select Slow. With the text box still selected, click AddEffect, point to Emphasis and select MoreEffects. In the AddEmphasisEffect dialog box, under Basic select Spin, and then click OK.Select the spin emphasis effect (third effect), and under Modify: Spin do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Amount list, select HalfSpin.In the Speed list select Slow. With the text box still selected, click AddEffect, point to Emphasis and select MoreEffects. In the AddEmphasisEffect dialog box, under Basic select Spin, and then click OK.Click the arrow to the right of the spin emphasis effect (fourth effect), select Effect Options,and do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, in the Custom box enter 30°, and then press ENTER.On the Effect tab, under Settings, in the Amount list, select Counterclockwise.On the Timing tab, in the Start list, select WithPrevious.On the Timing tab, in the Delay box enter 3.0 seconds.On the Timing tab, in the Speed box enter1 seconds (Fast).Click OK.To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.In the Direction, list click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left)Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors clickBlack, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).
  32. SmartArt custom animation effects: vertical picture list(Intermediate)To reproduce the SmartArt effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then clickBlank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click SmartArt. In the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, in the left pane, click List. In the List pane, double-click Vertical Picture List (fourth row, first option from the left) to insert the graphic into the slide. To create a fourth shape in the graphic, select the third shape from the top, and then under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the CreateGraphic group, click the arrow next to AddShape, and then click AddShapeBefore. Repeat this process to create a fifth shape.Select the graphic. Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Size, and then do the following:In the Height box, enter 6.38”.In the Width box, enter 7.91”.Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Arrange, click Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle. Click Align Center. Select the graphic, and then click one of the arrows on the left border. In the Type your text here dialog box, click each of the second-level bullets and then press DELETE until there are only three first-level bullets remaining (one for each shape). Enter text for each shape into the first-level bullets.On the slide, select the graphic. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select 14 from the Font Size list.Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, click More,and then under Best Match for Document click Moderate Effect (fourth option from the left). On the Design tab, in the Themes group, click Colors, and then click Civic. (Note: If this action is taken in a PowerPoint presentation containing more than one slide, the theme colors will be applied to all of the slides.) Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, click Change Colors, and then under Colorful click Colorful Range – Accent Colors 3 to 4 (third option from the left). Click each of the five picture placeholders in the graphic, and then in the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and click Insert.Press and hold CTRL, and then select all five of the pictures on the slide. Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shapes group, click ChangeShape, and then under Rectangles clickRoundDiagonalCornerRectangle (ninth option from the left).Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:Under Glow Variations, select Accent color 1, 5 pt glow (first row, first option from the left).Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Press and hold CTRL, and then select all of the larger rounded rectangles. Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shapes group, click ChangeShape, and then under Rectangles clickRoundDiagonalCornerRectangle (ninth option from the left). To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.On the slide, select the graphic. In the Custom Animation taskpane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then clickMoreEffects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, underSubtle, clickFade,and then click OK. Under Modify: Fade, in the Speed list, selectFast. Click Add Effect, point to Motion Paths, and then clickRight. Under Modify: Right, do the following:In the Start list, selectWith Previous.In the Speed list, select Fast. On the slide, right-click the right motion path and then click ReversePathDirection.Press and hold CTRL, and then select the two animationeffects in the Custom Animation task pane. Click the arrow to the right of one of those effects, and then clickEffectOptions. In theEffect Options dialog box, on the SmartArtAnimation tab, in the Group Graphic list, select One by One.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click the double arrows under each effect to expand the list of effects.Select the first animation effect (fade effect for the first rectangle). Under Modify: Fade, in the Start list, select With Previous.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, select the 11th animation effect (motion path for the first picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT to constrain the path to a straight horizontal line, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow). Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Drag the 11th effect until it is second in the list of effects. Drag the 12th effect (motion path for the first large rectangle) until it is fourth in the list of effects. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, select the 13th animation effect (motion path for the second picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the green arrow for the first picture motion path. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Drag the 13th animationeffect until it is sixth in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.Drag the 14th animation effect (motion path for the second large rectangle) until it is eighth in the list of effects. Select the 15th animation effect (motion path for the third picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the starting point for the first picture motion path. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Drag the 15th animation effect until it is 10th in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.Drag the 16th animation effect (motion path for the third large rectangle) until it is 12th in the list of effects. Select the 17th animation effect (motion path for the fourth picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the starting point for the first picture motion path. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Dragthe 17th animation effect until it is 14th in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.Drag the 18th animation effect (motion path for the fourth large rectangle) until it is 16th in the list of effects.Select the 19th animation effect (motion path for the fifth picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the starting point for the first picture motion path.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, drag the 19th animation effect until it is 18th in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Corner (fifth option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25%(fourth row, first option from the left).
  33. SmartArt custom animation effects: vertical picture list(Intermediate)To reproduce the SmartArt effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then clickBlank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click SmartArt. In the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, in the left pane, click List. In the List pane, double-click Vertical Picture List (fourth row, first option from the left) to insert the graphic into the slide. To create a fourth shape in the graphic, select the third shape from the top, and then under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the CreateGraphic group, click the arrow next to AddShape, and then click AddShapeBefore. Repeat this process to create a fifth shape.Select the graphic. Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Size, and then do the following:In the Height box, enter 6.38”.In the Width box, enter 7.91”.Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Arrange, click Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle. Click Align Center. Select the graphic, and then click one of the arrows on the left border. In the Type your text here dialog box, click each of the second-level bullets and then press DELETE until there are only three first-level bullets remaining (one for each shape). Enter text for each shape into the first-level bullets.On the slide, select the graphic. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select 14 from the Font Size list.Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, click More,and then under Best Match for Document click Moderate Effect (fourth option from the left). On the Design tab, in the Themes group, click Colors, and then click Civic. (Note: If this action is taken in a PowerPoint presentation containing more than one slide, the theme colors will be applied to all of the slides.) Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, click Change Colors, and then under Colorful click Colorful Range – Accent Colors 3 to 4 (third option from the left). Click each of the five picture placeholders in the graphic, and then in the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and click Insert.Press and hold CTRL, and then select all five of the pictures on the slide. Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shapes group, click ChangeShape, and then under Rectangles clickRoundDiagonalCornerRectangle (ninth option from the left).Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:Under Glow Variations, select Accent color 1, 5 pt glow (first row, first option from the left).Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Press and hold CTRL, and then select all of the larger rounded rectangles. Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shapes group, click ChangeShape, and then under Rectangles clickRoundDiagonalCornerRectangle (ninth option from the left). To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.On the slide, select the graphic. In the Custom Animation taskpane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then clickMoreEffects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, underSubtle, clickFade,and then click OK. Under Modify: Fade, in the Speed list, selectFast. Click Add Effect, point to Motion Paths, and then clickRight. Under Modify: Right, do the following:In the Start list, selectWith Previous.In the Speed list, select Fast. On the slide, right-click the right motion path and then click ReversePathDirection.Press and hold CTRL, and then select the two animationeffects in the Custom Animation task pane. Click the arrow to the right of one of those effects, and then clickEffectOptions. In theEffect Options dialog box, on the SmartArtAnimation tab, in the Group Graphic list, select One by One.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click the double arrows under each effect to expand the list of effects.Select the first animation effect (fade effect for the first rectangle). Under Modify: Fade, in the Start list, select With Previous.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, select the 11th animation effect (motion path for the first picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT to constrain the path to a straight horizontal line, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow). Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Drag the 11th effect until it is second in the list of effects. Drag the 12th effect (motion path for the first large rectangle) until it is fourth in the list of effects. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, select the 13th animation effect (motion path for the second picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the green arrow for the first picture motion path. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Drag the 13th animationeffect until it is sixth in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.Drag the 14th animation effect (motion path for the second large rectangle) until it is eighth in the list of effects. Select the 15th animation effect (motion path for the third picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the starting point for the first picture motion path. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Drag the 15th animation effect until it is 10th in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.Drag the 16th animation effect (motion path for the third large rectangle) until it is 12th in the list of effects. Select the 17th animation effect (motion path for the fourth picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the starting point for the first picture motion path. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Dragthe 17th animation effect until it is 14th in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.Drag the 18th animation effect (motion path for the fourth large rectangle) until it is 16th in the list of effects.Select the 19th animation effect (motion path for the fifth picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the starting point for the first picture motion path.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, drag the 19th animation effect until it is 18th in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Corner (fifth option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25%(fourth row, first option from the left).
  34. SmartArt custom animation effects: vertical picture list(Intermediate)To reproduce the SmartArt effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout, and then clickBlank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click SmartArt. In the Choose a SmartArt Graphic dialog box, in the left pane, click List. In the List pane, double-click Vertical Picture List (fourth row, first option from the left) to insert the graphic into the slide. To create a fourth shape in the graphic, select the third shape from the top, and then under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the CreateGraphic group, click the arrow next to AddShape, and then click AddShapeBefore. Repeat this process to create a fifth shape.Select the graphic. Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Size, and then do the following:In the Height box, enter 6.38”.In the Width box, enter 7.91”.Under SmartArt Tools, on the Format tab, click Arrange, click Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Middle. Click Align Center. Select the graphic, and then click one of the arrows on the left border. In the Type your text here dialog box, click each of the second-level bullets and then press DELETE until there are only three first-level bullets remaining (one for each shape). Enter text for each shape into the first-level bullets.On the slide, select the graphic. On the Home tab, in the Font group, select 14 from the Font Size list.Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, click More,and then under Best Match for Document click Moderate Effect (fourth option from the left). On the Design tab, in the Themes group, click Colors, and then click Civic. (Note: If this action is taken in a PowerPoint presentation containing more than one slide, the theme colors will be applied to all of the slides.) Under SmartArtTools, on the Design tab, in the SmartArtStyles group, click Change Colors, and then under Colorful click Colorful Range – Accent Colors 3 to 4 (third option from the left). Click each of the five picture placeholders in the graphic, and then in the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and click Insert.Press and hold CTRL, and then select all five of the pictures on the slide. Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shapes group, click ChangeShape, and then under Rectangles clickRoundDiagonalCornerRectangle (ninth option from the left).Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click Shape Effects, point to Glow, and then do the following:Under Glow Variations, select Accent color 1, 5 pt glow (first row, first option from the left).Point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Press and hold CTRL, and then select all of the larger rounded rectangles. Under SmartArtTools, on the Format tab, in the Shapes group, click ChangeShape, and then under Rectangles clickRoundDiagonalCornerRectangle (ninth option from the left). To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation.On the slide, select the graphic. In the Custom Animation taskpane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then clickMoreEffects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, underSubtle, clickFade,and then click OK. Under Modify: Fade, in the Speed list, selectFast. Click Add Effect, point to Motion Paths, and then clickRight. Under Modify: Right, do the following:In the Start list, selectWith Previous.In the Speed list, select Fast. On the slide, right-click the right motion path and then click ReversePathDirection.Press and hold CTRL, and then select the two animationeffects in the Custom Animation task pane. Click the arrow to the right of one of those effects, and then clickEffectOptions. In theEffect Options dialog box, on the SmartArtAnimation tab, in the Group Graphic list, select One by One.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click the double arrows under each effect to expand the list of effects.Select the first animation effect (fade effect for the first rectangle). Under Modify: Fade, in the Start list, select With Previous.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, select the 11th animation effect (motion path for the first picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT to constrain the path to a straight horizontal line, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow). Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Drag the 11th effect until it is second in the list of effects. Drag the 12th effect (motion path for the first large rectangle) until it is fourth in the list of effects. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, select the 13th animation effect (motion path for the second picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the green arrow for the first picture motion path. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Drag the 13th animationeffect until it is sixth in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.Drag the 14th animation effect (motion path for the second large rectangle) until it is eighth in the list of effects. Select the 15th animation effect (motion path for the third picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the starting point for the first picture motion path. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Drag the 15th animation effect until it is 10th in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.Drag the 16th animation effect (motion path for the third large rectangle) until it is 12th in the list of effects. Select the 17th animation effect (motion path for the fourth picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the starting point for the first picture motion path. Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Dragthe 17th animation effect until it is 14th in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.Drag the 18th animation effect (motion path for the fourth large rectangle) until it is 16th in the list of effects.Select the 19th animation effect (motion path for the fifth picture). On the slide, point to the starting point (green arrow) of the selected motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting point to the left of the endpoint (red arrow), into the same position as the starting point for the first picture motion path.Also in the CustomAnimation task pane, drag the 19th animation effect until it is 18th in the list of effects. Under Modify: Right, in the Start list, select With Previous.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Corner (fifth option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1, Darker 25%(fourth row, first option from the left).
  35. Custom animation effects: countdown(Advanced)Tip: For the effects on this slide, use a large picture that measures 7.5” high and 10” wide (the dimensions of the slide). To reproduce the animated picture effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 10” picture, and then click Insert.On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Crop from, in the Right box, enter 5.33”. (Note: Under Size and rotate, the Height should now be 7.5” and the Width should now be 5”.)On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Left.Click Align Middle.On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select the same 7.5” x 10” picture, and then click Insert.On the slide, select the second picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Crop from, in the Left box, enter 5.33”. (Note: Under Size and rotate, the Height should be 7.5” and the Width should now be 5”.)On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Right.Click Align Middle.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangle click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Right.Click Align Middle. With the rectangle still selected, on the Home tab, in the bottom right corner of the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane. In the Fill pane, select Solid fill, and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 10%.On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click Custom Animation.On the slide, select the left picture. In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point toEntrance, and then click More Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Peek In. Select the animation effect (peek-in effect for the left picture). Under Modify: Peek In, do the following:In the Start list, select With Previous.In the Direction list, select From Right.In the Speed list, select Medium. On the slide, select the second (right) picture. In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point toEntrance, and then click More Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Peek In. Select the second animation effect (peek-in effect for the right picture). Under Modify: Peek In, do the following:In the Start list, select With Previous.In the Direction list, select From Left.In the Speed list, select Medium. To reproduce the first animated text effects on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter Time for a short break in the text box. Select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select TW Cen MT.In the Font Size list, select 40. Click Bold. Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Right to align the text right in the text box.On the text box, drag the adjustment handles to adjust the size of the text box so that the text wraps onto two lines, as in the example above. Drag the text box onto the lower half of the slide, to the left of the middle.On the slide, select the text box. In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point toEntrance, and then click More Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Moderate, click Ascend. Select the third animation effect (ascend effect for the first text box). Click the arrow to the right of the selected effect, and then click Timing. In the Ascend dialog box, do the following:In the Start list, select With Previous.In the Delay box, enter 1.In the Speed list, select 1 seconds (Fast).To reproduce the other animated text effects on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box. On the slide, drag to draw a text box. Enter : in the second text box. Select the text in the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select TW Cen MT.In the Font Size list, select 90. Click Bold. Click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left). On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the colon left in the second text box. Drag the second text box into the upper half of the slide, to the right of the middle.On the slide, select the second text box. In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point toEntrance, and then click More Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Moderate, click Descend. Select the fourth animation effect (descend effect for the second text box). Under Modify: Descend, do the following:In the Start list, select With Previous.In the Speed list, select Fast.On the slide, select the second text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Click in the third text box, delete the colon, and then enter 10.Drag the 10 text box on top of the second text box, until the number is positioned to the right of the colon.On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane. In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the 10 text box. In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point toExit, and then click More Effects. In the Add Exit Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Disappear. Select the sixth animation effect (disappear effect for the second text box). Click the arrow to the right of the selected effect, and then click Timing. In the Disappear dialog box, on the Timing tab, do the following:In the Start list, select After Previous.In the Delay box, enter 1.In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the 10 text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. Click in the fourth text box, delete 10, and then enter 09 (the content of the previous text box, minus one second).In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the 09 text box. On the slide, drag the selected text box on top of the other text boxes.In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Select the seventh animation effect (descend effect for the 09 text box). Click Change, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Change Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Appear. Select the seventh animation effect (appear effect for the 09 text box). Click the arrow to the right of the selected effect, and then click Timing. In the Appear dialog box, on the Timing tab, in the Delay box, enter 1.In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the 09 text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate. On the slide, click in the duplicate text box, delete 09, and enter 08 (the content of the previous text box, minus one second).In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the 08 text box. On the slide, drag the selected text box on top of the other text boxes. On the slide, continue to duplicate, edit, and drag the text boxes as in steps 16-18, entering a number in each new text box that is one second less than the previous text box, until there is a total of 11 numbered text boxes. (Note: The final text box will contain 00). In the Custom Animation task pane, select the last animation effect (disappear effect for the 00 text box), and then click Remove.
  36. Custom animation effects: title fade-in on path and text fade by letter(Intermediate)Tip: For the effects on this slide, use a picture that measures 7.5” high (the height of the slide) and 2.61” wide.To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theDrawing group, clickShapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.Select the rectangle. Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following: In the ShapeHeight box, enter 3.17”.In the ShapeWidth box, enter 9.5”.Drag the rectangle slightly above the middle of the slide. Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Left.Under DrawingTools, on theFormat tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the next to ShapeOutline, and then click NoOutline.Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the FormatShape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 50% (fifth row, 10th option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).To reproduce the “heading” text box on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, select TextBox. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.Enter the heading text, and then select text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select Calibri.In the FontSize box, enter 38.Click Bold.Click the arrow next to FontColor, and then under ThemeColors click Orange, Accent 6, Darker 25% (fourth row, 10th option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click AlignTextLeft.Drag the text box just above the rectangle, in the right half of the slide. To reproduce the second text box on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click TextBox. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.Enter three lines of text with paragraph breaks, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select Calibri.In the FontSize list, select 28.Click Bold.Click the arrow next to FontColor, and then under ThemeColors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click AlignTextLeft.Drag the second text box onto the rectangle, below the “heading” text box. To reproduce the full-color picture on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, clickPicture. In the InsertPicture dialog box, select the 7.5” x 2.61” picture, and then click Insert.On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Crop from,in the Bottom box, enter 2.43”. (Note: Under Size and rotate, the Height should now be 5.08”.)On the slide, select the picture. UnderPicture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Effects, point to Glow, and then under Glow Variations click Accent color 1, 5 pt glow (first row, first option from the left).Also under PictureTools, on the Format tab, in the PictureStyles group, click PictureEffects, point to Glow, point to MoreGlowColors, and then under ThemeColors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Drag the full-color picture on top of the rectangle, to the left of the text boxes. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Top. To reproduce the second picture on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the InsertPicture dialog box, select the same 7.5” x 2.61” picture, and then click Insert. On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Crop from,in the Top box, enter 5.08”. (Note: Under Size and rotate, the Height should now be 2.43”.)On the slide, select the second, smaller picture. Under PictureTools, on the Format tab, in the PictureStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the FormatPicture dialog box, click Picture in the left pane, and in the Picture pane do the following:In the Brightness box, enter 70%.In the Contrast box, enter -70%.On the slide, drag the smaller picture until it is directly underneath the larger full-color picture.Select the smaller picture. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Bottom. Press and hold CTRL, and then select both pictures. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align Selected Objects.Click Align Center. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. On the slide, select the “heading” text box. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the AddEntranceEffect dialog box, under Subtle, click Fade.Select the animation effect (fade effect for the “heading” text box). Click the arrow to the right of the selected text box, and then click Timing. In the Fade dialog box, on the Timing tab, do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Delay box, enter 1.5.In the Speed list, select 2 seconds (Medium).On the slide, select the “heading” text box. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:ClickAddEffect, point to MotionPaths, and then click Left.Select the second animation effect (left motion path for the “heading” text box). Under Modify: Left,do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Speed list, select Medium. On the slide, right-click the left motion path and click ReversePathDirection. With the motion path still selected,point to the starting point (green arrow) of the motion path until the cursor becomes a two-headed arrow. Press and hold SHIFT, and then drag the starting pointabout 1.5” off the left edge of the slide. (Note: It may help to display the ruler. On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select Ruler. If your lines of text are longer than in the example above, you may need to further increase the length of the motion path. )On the slide, select the second text box. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the AddEntranceEffect dialog box, under Subtle, click Fade.Select the third animation effect (fade effect for the second text box). Click the arrow to the right of the selected effect, and then click Effect Options. In the Fade dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, do the following:In the Animate text list, select By Letter.In the % delay between letters box, enter 5.On the Timing tab, do the following:In the Start list, select AfterPrevious.In the Speed list, select 0.5 seconds (VeryFast).On the TextAnimation tab, in the Grouptext list, select By 1st Level Paragraphs.To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 40%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 232, Green: 227, and Blue: 216.
  37. Custom animation effects: shrink picture circle with text(Intermediate)To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the InsertPicture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.On the slide, select the picture. Under PictureTools, on the Format tab, in the PictureStyles group, click PictureShape, and then under BasicShapes click Oval (first row, first option from the left).Select the picture-filled oval. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, resize or crop the picture as needed so that under Size and rotate, the Height box is set to 6” and the Width box is set to 6”. Resize the picture under Size and rotate by entering values into the Height and Width boxes. Crop the picture under Crop from by entering values into the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom boxes. Under PictureTools, on the Format tab, in the PictureStyles group, click PictureEffects, point to Glow, and then under GlowVariations click Accent color 1, 18 pt glow (fourth row, first option from the left).Under PictureTools, on the Format tab, in the PictureStyles group, click PictureEffects, point to Glow, point to More Glow Colors, and then under ThemeColors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Picture dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane. In the Shadow pane, click the button next to Presets, under Inner click InsideDiagonalBottomLeft (third row, first option from the left), and then do the following:In the Transparency box, enter 50%.In the Blur box, enter 8 pt.In the Angle box, enter 135°.In the Distance box, enter 8 pt.On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click TextBox. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.Enter text, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select Candara.In the FontSize box, enter 30.Click the arrow next to FontColor, and then click Black, Text 1, Lighter 25% (fourth row, second option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click AlignTextLeft.On the slide, select the text box. Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the WordArt Styles group, click TextEffects, point to Reflection, and then under ReflectionVariations click TightReflection, touching (first row, first option from the left).Drag the text box onto the right half of the slide.With the text box still selected, on the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:Point to Align, and then click Align to Slide.Point to Align, and then click Align Right.Point to Align, and then click Align Middle.Click Send to Back. To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. On the slide, select the picture. In CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Wheel.Select the animation effect (wheel effect for the picture). Under Modify: Wheel,do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Spokes list, select 1 Spoke.In the Speed list, select Medium. On the slide, select the picture. In CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Subtle, click FadedZoom.Select the second animation effect (faded zoom effect for the picture). Under Modify: FadedZoom,do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Speed list, select Medium. On the slide, select the picture. In CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Emphasis, and then click More Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink.Select the third animation effect (grow/shrink effect for the picture). Click the arrow to the right of the selected effect, and then click EffectOptions. In the Grow/Shrink dialog box, do the following:On the Effect tab, under Settings, do the following:In the Size list, in the Custom box, enter 95%, and then press ENTER.Select SmoothStart.Select SmoothEnd.Select Auto-reverse.On the Timing tab, do the following: In the Start list, select AfterPrevious. In the Speed box, enter 0.3 seconds. On the slide, select the picture. In CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Emphasis, and then click More Effects. In the Add Emphasis Effect dialog box, under Basic, click Grow/Shrink.Select the fourth animation effect (grow/shrink effect for the picture). Under Grow/Shrink, do the following:In the Start list, select AfterPrevious.In the Size list, select Smaller.In the Speed list, select Medium. On the slide, select the picture. In CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:ClickAddEffect, point to MotionPaths, and then click Left.Select the fifth animation effect (left motion path for the picture). Under Modify: Left,do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Speed list, select Medium.On the slide, select the text box. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Subtle, select Fade.Select the sixth animation effect (fade effect for the text box). Click the arrow to the right of the selected effect, and then click Timing. In the Fade dialog box, on the Timing tab, do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Delay box, enter 1.5.In the Speed list, select 1 seconds (Fast).On the slide, select the text box. In CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:ClickAddEffect, point to MotionPaths, and then click Left.Select the seventh animation effect (left motion path for the text box). Under Modify: Left,do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Speed list, select Fast.On the slide, right–click the selected motion path for the text box, and then clickReversePathDirection. To reproduce the rectangle on this slide, do the following: On the Home tab, in theDrawing group, clickShapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle.Select the rectangle.Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the ShapeHeight box, enter 1.54”.In theShapeWidth box, enter 10”.Under DrawingTools, on theFormat tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the arrow next to ShapeOutline, and then click NoOutline.Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the ShapeStyles group, click the FormatShape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, clickFill in the left pane, selectGradientfill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Right (first row, fourth option from the left). Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 88%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 43%.On the Home tab, in the Drawinggroup, click Arrange, and then do the following:Point to Align, and then click Align to Slide. Point to Align, and then clickAlignMiddle.Point to Align, and then clickAlignCenter.Click Send to Back. To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Radial.Click the button next to Direction, and then click From Center (third option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).
  38. Tinted pictures in shapes(Intermediate)To reproduce the first shape effect from the left on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert. Select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher.In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, resize or crop the picture as needed so that under Size and rotate, the Height box is set to 2.75” and the Width box is set to 2.92”. Resize the picture under Size and rotate by entering values into the Height and Width boxes. Crop the picture under Crop from by entering values into the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom boxes. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Shape, and then under Rectangles click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Effects, point to Shadow, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left). Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Effects, point to Glow, and then under GlowVariations, click Accent color 1, 8 pt glow (second row, first option from the left).Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Effects, point to Glow, point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in theAdjust group, click Recolor, and then under Light Variations select Accent color 5 Light (sixth option from the left). Select the rectangle. Drag the left yellow diamond adjustment handle to the top left corner, to remove the rounding on the top left and bottom right corners. Drag the right yellow diamond adjustment handle slightly to the left, to round the top right and bottom left corners. To reproduce the middle shape effect from the left on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture and then click Insert. Select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher.In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, resize or crop the picture as needed so that under Size and rotate, the Height box is set to 2.75” and the Width box is set to 4.32”. Resize the picture under Size and rotate by entering values into the Height and Width boxes. Crop the picture under Crop from by entering values into the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom boxes. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Shape, and then under Rectangles click Round Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left).Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Effects, point to Shadow, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left). Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Effects, point to Glow, and then under GlowVariations, click Accent color 1, 8pt glow (second row, first option from the left).Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Effects, point to Glow, point to More Glow Colors, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in theAdjust group, click Recolor, and then under Light Variations select Accent color 1 Light (second option from the left).Select the rectangle. Drag the left yellow diamond adjustment handle slightly to the left, to decrease rounding on the top left and bottom right corners. Drag the rectangle on the slide to position it to the right of the first rectangle. To reproduce the third shape effect from the left on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles, click Rounded Diagonal Corner Rectangle (ninth option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rounded rectangle.Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 2.75”.In the Shape Width box, enter 2.25”. Drag the rectangle on the slide to position it to the right of the second picture-filled rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, click Solid fill in the right pane, and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Olive Green, Accent 3, Darker 25% (fifth row, seventh option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 55%.Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, and then select No line in the right pane. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Shadow in the left pane, and then do the following in the right pane:Click the button next to Presets, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 65%.In the Blur box, enter 5 pt.In the Angle box, enter 225°.In the Distancebox, enter4 pt.On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw the text box. Enter text in the text box, select the text, and then on the Home tab, in the Font group, select Trebuchet MS from the Font list, enter 22 in the Font Size box, click the arrow next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left in the text box.Drag the text box onto the olive green rounded rectangle. Press and hold CTRL and select both objects.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then click Group.Press and hold CTRL and select the two pictures and the new group.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align Selected Objects.Click Align Middle.Click Distribute Horizontally.To reproduce the text below the shapes, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw the text box. Enter text in the text box, select the text, and then on the Home tab, in the Font group, select Trebuchet MS from the Font list, select 18 from the Font Size list, and then click the arrow next to Font Color and click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Align Text Left to align the text left in the text box. To reproduce the white vertical line on the left side of the text box, select the space to the left of the text.On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Symbol.In the Symbol dialog box, do the following:In the Font list, select (normal text).In the Subset list, select Latin-1 Supplement.In the Character Code box, enter 007C to select Vertical Line, and then click Insert.On the slide, select the vertical line. On the Home tab, in the Font group, click the button next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select the text box. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and click Duplicate.Drag the text boxes under each of the picture-filled rectangles. To reproduce the background on this slide, do the following: Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the right pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Diagonal (first row, third option from the left).In the Angle box, enter 45°.Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until three stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, and then click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 52%.Click the button next to Color, and then click Tan, Background 2 (first row, third option from the left). Select Stop 3 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, click More Colors, and then in the Colors dialog box, on the Custom tab, enter values for Red: 170, Green: 164, Blue: 140.
  39. Custom animation effects: line sweeps in picture and text(Basic)To reproduce the shape effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in theSlides group, click Layout, and then click Blank.On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Lines click Line (first option from the left).On the slide, press and hold SHIFT, and then drag to draw a straight, vertical line.Select the line. Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, in the Shape Width box, enter 7.5”.Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click the Format Shape dialog box launcher. In the Format Shape dialog box, click LineColor in the left pane. In the LineColor pane, select Solidline, click the button next to Color, and then under ThemeColors click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click LineStyle in the left pane. In the LineStyle pane, in the Weight box, enter 2 pt.Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click ShapeEffects, point to Glow, and then under GlowVariations click Accent color 1, 5 pt glow (first row, first option from the left). Under DrawingTools, on the Format tab, in the ShapeStyles group, click ShapeEffects, point to Glow, point to MoreGlowColors, and then under ThemeColors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click AlignCenter.Click AlignMiddle.On the slide, select the line. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow under Paste, and then click Duplicate.Drag the duplicate line slightly off the right edge of the slide.With the duplicate line still selected, on the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following: Click Align to Slide. Click Align Middle.On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the InsertPicture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert.On the slide, select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, resize or crop the picture as needed so that under Size and rotate, the Height box is set to 7.5” and the Width box is set to 5”. Resize the picture under Size and rotate by entering values into the Height and Width boxes. Crop the picture under Crop from by entering values into the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom boxes. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.ClickAlignRight.ClickAlignMiddle.To reproduce the text effects on this slide, do the following:On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click TextBox. On the slide, drag to draw a text box.Enter text in the text box, and then select the text. On the Home tab, in the Font group, do the following:In the Font list, select Arial.In the FontSize list, select 28.Click Bold.Click the button next to FontColor, and then under ThemeColors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click AlignTextRight to align the text right in the text box. Drag the text box onto the left half of the slide.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 40%.Click the button next to Color, and then click Black, Text 1 (first row, second option from the left).Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then click Black, Text 1, Lighter 50% (second row, second option from the left).To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click CustomAnimation. Select the line off the right edge of the slide. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the AddEntranceEffect dialog box, under Basic, click FlyIn.Select the animation effect (fly-in effect for the second line). Under Modify: Fly In,do the following:In the Start list, select After Previous.In the Direction list, select FromLeft.In the Speed list, select Fast.On the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Select, and then click Selection Pane.In the Selection and Visibility pane, select the first line you created (in the middle of the slide). In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the AddEntranceEffect dialog box, under Basic, click FlyIn.Select the second animation effect (fly-in effect for the first line). Under Modify: Fly In,do the following:In the Start list, select AfterPrevious.In the Direction list, select FromRight.In the Speed list, select Fast.On the slide, select the picture. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the AddEntranceEffect dialog box, under Basic, click Wipe.Select the third animation effect (wipe effect for the picture). Under Modify: Wipe,do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Direction list, select FromRight.In the Speed list, select Fast.On the slide, select the text box. In the CustomAnimation task pane, do the following:Click AddEffect, point to Entrance, and then click MoreEffects. In the AddEntranceEffect dialog box, under Basic, clickFlyIn.Select the fourth animation effect (fly-in effect for the text box). Under Modify: Fly In,do the following:In the Start list, select WithPrevious.In the Direction list, select FromRight.In the Speed list, select Fast.
  40. Custom animation effects: recolored picture with full-color section and motion path(Advanced)To reproduce the picture effects on this slide, do the following:On the Home tab, in the Slides group, click Layout and then click Blank. On the Insert tab, in the Illustrations group, click Picture. In the Insert Picture dialog box, select a picture, and then click Insert. Select the picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, resize or crop the picture as needed so that under Size and rotate, the Height box is set to 3.58” and the Width box is set to 8”. Resize the picture under Size and rotate by entering values into the Height and Width boxes. Crop the picture under Crop from by entering values into the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom boxes. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Recolor, and then under Dark Variations click Text color 2 Dark (first option from the left). Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Picture Styles group, click Picture Effects, point to Shadow, and then under Inner click Inside Diagonal Top Left (first row, first option from the left).Drag the picture so that it is positioned above the middle of the slide. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click the arrow next to Paste, and then click Duplicate.Press and hold CTRL and select both pictures on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align to Slide.Click Align Center. Click Align Selected Objects. Click Align Middle. Click the slide background area to cancel the selection of both pictures. Select the duplicate (top) picture. Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the bottom right corner of the Size group, click the Size and Position dialog box launcher. In the Size and Position dialog box, on the Size tab, under Crop from,enter valuesinto the Left andRight boxes so that under Size and rotate, and the Width box is set to 2.33”. (Note: For best results, crop the duplicate picture to tightly focus on a single element in the original picture.)Under Picture Tools, on the Format tab, in the Adjust group, click Recolor, and then under No Recolor click No Recolor. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw a rectangle. Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 7.5”.In the Shape Width box, enter 2.33”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, select Gradient fill in the Fill pane, and then do the following:In the Type list, select Linear.Click the button next to Direction, and then click Linear Down (first row, second option from the left).Under Gradient stops, click Add or Remove until two stops appear in the drop-down list.Also under Gradient stops, customize the gradient stops that you added as follows:Select Stop 1 from the list, and then do the following:In the Stop position box, enter 0%.Click the button next to Color, then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 55%.Select Stop 2 from the list, and then do the following: In the Stop position box, enter 100%.Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).In the Transparency box, enter 100%.On the slide, drag the rectangle to cover the duplicate picture. Select the rectangle. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, and then do the following:Point to Align, and then click Align to Slide.Point to Align, and then click Align Middle. Click Send Backward. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Shapes, and then under Rectangles click Rectangle (first option from the left). On the slide, drag to draw another rectangle. Select the rectangle. Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Size group, do the following:In the Shape Height box, enter 4”.In the Shape Width box, enter 2.67”.Under Drawing Tools, on the Format tab, in the Shape Styles group, click the arrow next to Shape Fill, point to Gradient, and then click More Gradients. In the Format Shape dialog box, click Fill in the left pane. In the Fill pane, select No fill. Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Color in the left pane, select Solid line in the Line Color pane, and then do the following:Click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left). In the Transparency box, enter 70%.Also in the Format Shape dialog box, click Line Style in the left pane, and then do the following in the Line Style pane:In the Width box, enter 0.75 pt. Click the button next to Dash type, and then click Square Dot (third option from the top).Drag the dotted rectangle on top of the small, full-color picture. Press and hold SHIFT and select the dotted rectangle, the small picture, and the large picture on the slide. On the Home tab, in the Drawing group, click Arrange, point to Align, and then do the following:Click Align Selected Objects. Click Align Middle. On the Insert tab, in the Text group, click Text Box, and then on the slide, drag to draw the text box.Enter text in the text box, select the text, and then on the Home tab, in the Font group, select Gill Sans MT Condensedfrom the Font list, select 24 from the Font Size list, click the button next to Font Color, and then under Theme Colors click White, Background 1 (first row, first option from the left).On the Home tab, in the Paragraph group, click Center to center the text within the text box.On the slide, drag the text box below the dotted rectangle.To reproduce the background effects on this slide, do the following:Right-click the slide background area, and then click Format Background. In the Format Background dialog box, click Fill in the left pane, and then select Solid fill in the Fill pane. Also in the Fill pane, click the button next to Color, and then under Theme Colors click Black, Text 1, Lighter 15% (fifth row, second option from the left).To reproduce the animation effects on this slide, do the following:To view the area beyond the slide, on the View tab, click Zoom, and then in the Zoom dialog box, in the Percent box, enter 70%. (Note: Make sure that Fit is not selected in the Zoom dialog box.)On the Animations tab, in the Animations group, click Custom Animation. On the slide, select the dotted rectangle. In the Custom Animation task pane, click Add Effect, point to Motion Paths, point to Draw Custom Path, and then click Freeform. Press and hold SHIFT to conform the path to a straight, horizontal line, and then do the following on the slide:Click the center of the dotted rectangle to create the first motion-path point.Click approximately ½” beyond the right edge of the rectangle to create the second motion-path point. Double-click approximately 2” beyond the left edge of the slide to create the third and final motion-path point. On the slide, right-click the freeform motion path, and then click Reverse Path Direction. On the slide, select the freeform motion path. In the Custom Animation task pane, under Modify: Custom Path, in the Start list, select With Previous. On the slide, select the gradient-filled rectangle. In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Subtle, click Fade, and then click OK. Under Modify: Fade, in the Start list, select With Previous.Under Modify: Fade, in the Speed list, select Very Fast.Click Add Effect, point to Motion Paths, and then click Down.Under Modify: Down, in the Start list, select With Previous. Under Modify: Down, in the Speed list, select Medium. On the slide, right-click the down motion path and click ReversePathDirection.On the slide, select the smaller, full-color picture. In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Subtle, click Fade, and then click OK. Under Modify: Fade, in the Start list, select With Previous.Under Modify: Fade, in the Speed list, select Very Fast.Right-click the picture fade effect in the pane, and then click Timing. In the Fade dialog box, on the Timing tab, in the Delay box, enter 1.5.On the slide, select the text box. In the Custom Animation task pane, do the following:Click Add Effect, point to Entrance, and then click More Effects. In the Add Entrance Effect dialog box, under Moderate, click Descend, and then click OK. Under Modify: Descend, in the Start list, select With Previous. Under Modify:Descend, in the Speed list, select Fast.
  41. For reproduction steps for this slide, refer to the PowerPoint template titled “Static text effects for PowerPoint slides” (STATIC_TEXT.potx), slide number 17.